Division 16 - Electrical Work

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS
DESIGN CONSULTANTS STAMP:

STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16000
SOLAR PANEL UNITS
SAUDI ARABIAN MINING COMPANY

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.BOX 684 AL-KHOBAR

IFB 00 15/03/2011 Issue for Bid IGA MAM MFU

ISSUE RE DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARE CHECKED APPROVED REMARKS
Discipline: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001
CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

TRANSPORTATION OF TREATED WATER FROM TAIF TO MAADEN MINE SITE
Page 1 of 13
DIVISION 16 SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL WORKS SOLAR PANEL UNITS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.02 Codes and Standards
1.03 Submittals
1.04 Environmental Condition
1.05 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Componenets and Equipments
2.02 Tagging
2.03 Units and Scales
2.04 Description of System
2.05 Special Requirements
2.06 Solar Modules and Panels
2.07 Supporting Structure
2.08 Charge Regulator
2.09 Distribution Board
2.10 AC/DC Battery Charger
2.11 Cabinets
2.12 Batteries
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 General
3.02 Design Factor
3.03 Wiring
3.04 Overcurrent Protection
3.05 Painting
3.06 Cables and Cable Laying
3.07 Installation
3.08 Workshop Test
3.09 Site Test
3.10 Documentation
3.11 Shipping
3.12 Spare Parts and Special Tools
DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001
Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

TRANSPORTATION OF TREATED WATER FROM TAIF TO MAADEN MINE SITES Page 2 of 13
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
This document covers the requirements for the design, manufacturing, construction,
installation, test and commissioning of solar panel units to be used for the remote stations for
the Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold sites without permanent
power supply from SEC or other facilities.
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of solar panel
units shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least. The latest
revision of the publication referred to shall apply.
IEC 60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters
IEC 60255 Electrical relays
IEC 60269 Low-voltage fuses
IEC 60439 Low voltage switchgear and assemblies
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60891 Procedures for temperature and irradiance corrections to measured I-V
characteristics of chrystalline silicon photovoltaic devices
IEC 60904 Photovoltaic devices
IEC 61215 Crystalline silicon terrestrial photovoltaic modules
IEC 61427 Secondary cells and batteries for solar photovoltaic energy systems
IEC 62259 Nickel-Cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells with partial gas
recombination

15 Mar, 2011
As far as the power supply authority (SEC) or permits of other authorities require additional
codes and standards, respectively impose additional requirements, these are also part of the
contract.
1.03 Submittals
Forward to the Company Representative for review and approval the following submittals.
Refer also to appropriate specification sections for other submittal requirements.
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Prior to Commencing WORK: Shop drawings of proposed installations that deviate

from the original design.
C. Prior to Final Acceptance: Record documents which shall indicate installed conditions
for:
1. Major raceways systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior;
locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse
and circuit breaker size and arrangements.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

building lines.
3. Approved substitutions, modifications and actual equipment and materials

installed.
C. Maintenance Manuals: Submit maintenance manuals which shall include the
following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start- up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,
shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating
instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.

15 Mar, 2011
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.04 Environmental Conditions
The solar panel units shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation at full load
under the climatic and environmental conditions as described in the specification Design and
Construction of Power Supply Systems.
With exception of the solar panels, the units shall be installed in equipment containers without
forced ventilation or air conditioning.
1.05 Technical Data
The technical data of the solar panel units are defined in the data sheets. The Contractor has
to guarantee the fulfillment of these requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Components and Equipment
The Contractor has to take care that all components and equipment are selected considering
easy maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and long maintenance intervals.
All components and equipment shall be designed for continuous duty at rated load and under
the given climatic conditions. Standard industrial high performance systems and components
of suppliers standard lists shall be used as far as possible. Components and equipment of
same kind and type shall be selected for equivalent functions. The interchangeability must be
guaranteed.
2.02 Tagging
All components, equipment and installations shall receive the respective tagging plates,
labels, etc., which have to be of extremely durable material resistant against the
environmental conditions. Tagging plates or labels on fronts of enclosures shall be fixed with
screws.
For further requirements, reference is made to specification Design and Construction of

Power Supply Systems.
The metric system on basis of SI-units shall be used for all scales and indications.

15 Mar, 2011
2.04 Description of the System
Each solar panel unit shall consist of the following main parts:
solar panels,
charge regulator,
supporting structures,
battery bank,
battery charger,
Distribution board.
The solar power units shall supply continuously output voltage of 24 V DC 10%.
On the solar panel units are connected continuous consumers (SCADA and
telecommunication system, cathodic protection rectifiers) and the container lighting as a
short time consumer.
The Vendor/Manufacturer shall have local representative in Saudi Arabia and shall have
maintenance team available with minimum five years of experience to attend any
maintenance issues.
2.06 Solar Modules and Panels
The solar panels shall consist of high quality and high efficient solar modules of mono-
crystalline silicon cells with glass cover fully encapsulated and incorporated in stainless steel
or anodized aluminum frame structure.
The solar panels must be designed for maximum reliability and minimum maintenance. The
modules shall be resistant against water, salt, sand abrasion, hail impact and all other
environmental site conditions.
Only well proven industrial products with at least 5 years experience in Middle East countries
shall be used. In view of very high ultra violet contents in solar radiation in the region the solar
panels / solar cells must be designed with consideration of this factor. A test certificate shall
be submitted to proof that no detrimental effects resulting from radiation will accelerates aging
or cause damage of solar cell junctions
The quantity of solar modules and the power is to be selected by the Contractor according to
the ambient conditions, the power requirement and the specified design factors.

15 Mar, 2011
2.07 Supporting Structure
The modules shall be installed on suitable standard mounting structures under the desired tilt
angle, to be defined by the Contractor.
The supporting structures shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized steel. The steel or
aluminum frame of the solar modules must be isolated from the steel structure to avoid
localized corrosion. Stainless steel fixings shall be used, only.
GI structures shall be painted with epoxy paint.
The supporting structures shall be constructed in a manner such that a future extension is
possible.
Internal grounding connections between the panels and the structure shall be foreseen with
two connection points to the station grounding mesh.
The supporting structure must be designed for the wind load defined in the specification
Design and Construction of Power Supply Systems.
2.08 Charge Regulator
For loading of the batteries and control of the consumer voltage a suitable charge regulator
shall be provided.
The charge regulator shall mainly consist of the following
Surge protection for input and output,
Fully automated three tier charging system (boost/float charging and equalization),
Protection diodes between solar modules and charger
Protection devices against overload, overcharge and over-discharging, including all
control, indication and monitoring facilities,
Switches, circuit breakers, fuse, etc.
For external use the status and the fault signals and as well an over-discharging pre-alarm
shall be wired to a common terminal stripe.
For each solar panel unit a distribution board shall be provided.

The distribution boards shall be equipped with 2-pole miniature circuit breaker, sized
according to the requirements and with the respective terminal stripes.
Further, an earth fault supervision unit shall be provided. For future extension each
distribution board shall have at least 20 % full installed spare and further 20 % spare place to
install additional devices.
For remote monitoring the summary alarm of molded case circuit breaker tripping and the
release of the earth fault supervision shall be wired on terminal stripe. The transfer of the

15 Mar, 2011
mentioned signal shall be carried out via potential free contact. The terminals shall be located
beside the terminal stripes for remote monitoring of charge regulator.
2.10 AC/DC Battery Charger
For maintenance and stand-by purpose of the solar panel unit a separate AC/DC battery
charger with a switch over device regulator/battery charger and back shall be provided.
The AC/DC battery charger shall be fed from external 400/230 V AC, 60 Hz via power socket
and mobile diesel generator.
The AC/DC battery charger shall be able to charge the batteries in the shortest possible time
and shall have a spare capacity of 30% for future extension.
2.11 Cabinet
The charge regulator, the distribution board and the AC/DC battery charger shall be installed
in separated parts of a common, metal enclosed, self standing cabinet.
The cabinets shall be suitable for installation against the wall. The cabinets shall only be
accessible from the front. The hinged front doors shall be swinged out more than 90.
The bottom of cabinets shall be covered with galvanized steel sheets. If necessary for air
circulation, holed steel sheets can be used. The cable entries shall be designed in a manner
such that a sealing after cable laying is possible without any problem.
All nuts for fixing of components shall be welded on the steel structure or threads will be cut in
the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self cutting screws is not allowed.
Screws, nuts and washers shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
The degree of protection shall be IP 31, at least.
2.12 Batteries
The batteries shall be very low-maintenance NiCd type. Only batteries for photovoltaic
application with a high discharging and temperature rate will be accepted.
The solar batteries shall be constituted of vented Ni-Cd cells type with pocket plate
technology and shall fully comply with IEC 61427 in conjunction with IEC 62259. For low
maintenance reasons cells have to be designed with internal recombination system and flame
arresting vents. A recombination feature by adding external gas recombination vents only is
not acceptable. The cells shall be housed in polypropylene containers. Battery safety and
installation shall fully comply with EN 50272-2. Life span of the batteries shall be 15 years at
operating maximum temperature of 50C.
The capacity shall be suitable for at least 72 hours without sunshine, including spare margin
of 20% and the required de-rating and ageing factors for the actual operating conditions.

15 Mar, 2011
The battery shall be installed in a separate, metal enclosed, self standing cabinet.
The battery cabinet shall be of same type and layout as the cabinet for the other facilities of
solar panel units and provided with suitable venting elements in order to reduce the ambient
temperatures for the batteries as much as possible. The battery cabinet shall be sized with
sufficient space, to allow an arrangement for future extension with batteries of 30% more
capacity.
The guaranteed battery life time under the given operating conditions has to be defined by the
Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General
The solar panels shall be sized in a manner such that all connected consumers can be
supplied. An additional charging and floating of the battery bank must be possible (also
applicable, if the battery was drained prior start of charging).
To keep the quantity of solar panels on the required minimum, the Contractor shall work in co
operation with the manufacturers of the equipment container and of SCADA and
telecommunication system.
The design of the solar panel units shall be carried out under consideration of the below
mentioned design factors. Additional factors may be recommended by the Contractor.
3.13 Design Factors
The following factors shall be used for design of the solar power supply units:
De-rating factor 1.10 (for build-up of dust on panels)
Ageing factor 1.25
Safety factor 1.20 (spare margin)
3.14 Wiring
The wires shall be selected according to load, insulation level, function and operating
requirements. The wires shall be adequately rated and equipped with fuses/circuit breakers of
adequate size.
The wiring colors and the minimum cross sections shall be according to specification Design
and Construction of Power Supply Systems.

15 Mar, 2011
The wiring shall be carried out solid and safe against damages. Wires shall be bundled and
fixed. The wiring shall be laid inside of wiring channels, preferably. If wiring channels will be
used, a spare of 20 % shall be foreseen.
All circuits and auxiliary contacts shall be terminated on terminal stripes. Terminal stripes
shall have at least 10 % spare terminals. If wires with different potential will be terminated on
one terminal stripe the respective terminals shall be separated by means of isolating plates.
The termination of multiple stranded wires has to be carried out by means of multiple core
cable ends.
Terminals shall be marked durable and easy readable, corresponding to the drawings. Wires
shall be marked on the termination of each wire with the number of the corresponding
connection point.
3.04 Overvoltage Protection
The solar panel units shall be designed in a manner such that overvoltages caused flashes,
do not impair the safety in operation of the units.
The distribution boards shall be equipped with additionally overvoltage protectors.

The electronic devices shall be separately protected against overvoltages.
3.05 Painting
All components and devices shall have a resistant, long term stable, high quality painting. At
least two layers have to be applied.
Damages, caused by transport, installation, cabling or commissioning shall be repaired in a
way, that the original quality is restored.
An additional painting at location of installation is not allowed.
3.05 CABLES AND CABLE LAYING

For the cable connections between the different parts of the solar panel units, PVC insulated
copper cables shall be used.
The cables shall be selected according to nominal voltage, voltage drop and short circuit
current. The minimum cross section for power and signal cables shall be according to
specification Design and Construction of Power Supply Systems.
Signal cables shall be provided with copper screen. The cables to battery banks must be
short circuit proof.

15 Mar, 2011
3.07 Installation
The delivery, installation and commissioning of the solar panel units shall include, but not
limited to the following items:
Transport to location of installation (if necessary storage), and the complete mounting,
Cable connections between the different parts of solar panel units,
Grounding and potential equalization for the parts, including connection with the next
grounding bus bars,
Termination of all cables at the solar panel units,
Commissioning of the functioning solar panel units,
Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during installation and
commissioning phase and during a training on site
The installation and as well the tests and the commissioning shall be carried out with
Contractors own staff and with own tools and measuring/test devices.
3.08 Workshop Tests
All components of the solar panel units shall be tested completely and detailed in
manufacturers workshop. The batteries and solar modules may be tested separately. All tests
required by the codes and standards as well as all manufactures tests have to be performed.
The test program for the work shop test has to be submitted at least 3 weeks prior to start of
the tests.
The following tests shall be carried out, at least:

Test of all functions,
Check of degree of protection,
Mechanical operation test on all equipment,
Operation test of the relays and releasers,
Tripping of circuit breakers,
Test of auxiliary electrical devices,
Verification of wiring and terminal blocks,
Compliance with the specifications.
Detailed test protocols of all tests performed have to be submitted prior to shipment.

15 Mar, 2011
3.09 Site Tests
The site tests shall include the following steps:
Pre-commissioning (including loop testing),

Commissioning and test on completion,
Performance test including battery capacity test.
The aim of the tests is to ensure the proper function of the complete scope.
3.10 Documentation
Complete documentation shall be provided for the design, manufacturing, testing,

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the solar panel units and their
components.
All documents shall be in English language.
The documentation of the solar panel units shall include the following documents and
drawings (minimum requirements):
Technical data sheets

Layout drawings for all devices, cabinets and solar panels
Calculation of supporting structure and its foundation
Foundation drawings for solar panels
Schedules
Single line diagrams
Block diagrams
Wiring diagrams
Termination drawings
Cable lists
Spare parts list
List of used devices with manufacturer
Software and software description (if any)
Operation and maintenance manual
Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.

15 Mar, 2011
The documents listed above shall be handed over for approval.

Special attention has to be given to the fact, that documentation must be submitted with
sufficient time allocated for approval prior to manufacturing / assembly.
Documentation has to be prepared in accordance with the relevant ISO standards or in the
absence of relevant details in those standards the DIN standards shall apply
The final documentation shall be delivered on paper in sufficient number and with exception
of the signed protocols in electronic form, also. The type of the electronic files shall be agreed
with the Client.
3.11 SHIPPING
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged. All parts of one solar
panel unit should be shipped as a common delivery. The material, especially loose parts and
spare parts shall be clearly labeled according to the designation.
3.12 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

The Contractor shall deliver all spare parts, which are necessary for commissioning and two
years operation time (see General Description of Project and Works).
Spare parts shall be available until ten years after commissioning.
All necessary special tools for operation and maintenance of the solar panel units shall be
supplied for each location, at least consisting of:
1 set of all special tools required for operation and maintenance,

1 set fuses (6 fuses of each used size),
Key set for cabinet doors and locks,
Software for special equipment (if any).
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16001
UPS EQUIPMENT




Page 1 of 14
ELECTRICAL WORKS UPS EQUIPMENT
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
1.05 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 Tagging
2.04 Description of System
2.06 Mechanical Requirements
2.07 Electrical Requirements
2.08 Bypass
2.09 Measuring Instruments
2.10 Battries
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Wiring
3.02 Overcurrent Protection
3.03 Painting
3.04 Cables and Cable Laying
3.05 Installation
3.06 Workshop Test
3.07 Site Test
3.08 Documentation
3.09 Shipping
DICIPLINE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
installation, test and commissioning of uninterruptible power supply equipment (UPS) for AC
consumers for the Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold sites.
1.02 Codes and standards
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of

uninterruptible power supplies shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards,
at least. The latest revision of the publication referred to shall apply.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their
accessories
IEC 60076 Power Transformers
IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters
IEC 60269 Low-voltage fuses
IEC 60289 Reactors
IEC 60439 Low voltage switchgear and assemblies
IEC 60896 Stationary lead acid batteries. General requirements and methods of test
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear

15 Mar, 2011
IEC 60989 Separating transformers
IEC 61558 Safety of power transformers

As far as the power supply authority (SEC) and permits of other authorities require additional
contract.
1.03 Submittals

for:

building lines.

installed.
D. Maintenance Manuals: Submit maintenance manuals which shall include the



15 Mar, 2011

instructions.
instructions.
The uninterruptible power supplies shall be designed and constructed for continuous
operation at full load under the climatic and environmental conditions as described in the
The UPSs shall be installed in rooms of the electrical buildings. The rooms will be equipped
with air conditioning.
1.04 Technical Data
The technical data of the uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) are defined in the data sheets.
The Contractor has to guarantee the fulfillment of these requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
guaranteed.
2.02 Tagging
screws.

15 Mar, 2011

2.04 Description of The System
Each uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall consist of the following main parts:
three isolation transformers,

two rectifiers,
two battery banks,
two inverters,
static bypass,
manual bypass,
One distribution board.
During normal network conditions the AC consumers will be supplied via both rectifier/inverter
circuits, which work in half-load operation mode. At the same time the battery bank will be
trickle charged. In case of interrupt on one feeder or failure of one rectifier/inverter circuit the
other circuit takes over the supply of all consumers. If both feeders are without voltage the
consumers shall be fed via the battery. After return of the feeders the rectifiers take up the
operation automatically, feed the inverters and charge the battery. In case of overload or UPS
failure the consumers shall be fed via the static bypass. For maintenance a manual bypass
shall be provided.
maintenance issues.
2.06 Mechanical Requirements
The uninterruptible power supplies shall be industrial type; metal enclosed factory assembled
with self standing cabinets and with fix mounted units and devices.

15 Mar, 2011
The cabinets shall be suitable for back-to-back installation or installation against the wall. The
cabinets shall only be accessible from the front. The hinged front doors shall be swinged out
more than 90.
The cabinets will be mounted on cable cellar. The bottom of cabinets shall be covered with
galvanized steel sheets. If necessary for air circulation, holed steel sheets can be used.
The cable entries shall be designed in a manner such that a sealing after cable laying is
possible without any problem. Further, each cover sheet shall be equipped with a grounding
connection to the steel frame of cabinet.
All nuts for fixing of components shall be welded on the steel structure or threads will be cut in
the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self cutting screws is not allowed.
Screws, nuts and washers shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. To have an uniformed
layout all cabinets shall be of the same height and depth.
2.07 Electrical Requirements
Rectifier
The UPSs shall be equipped with full wave rectifiers. Each rectifier shall be suitable to supply
all connected consumers. An additional charging and floating of the battery banks must be
possible (also applicable, if the battery was drained prior to start of charging).
The rectifiers shall be designed for operation with natural air cooling.
Each rectifier shall mainly consist of the following:
fully-controlled semi-conductor bridge with current and voltage control,
filters to limit the AC components of output,
moulded case circuit breakers for AC and DC,
miniature circuit breakers for control circuits,
devices for overvoltage protection,
Indicator board for all signals of the system (mounted in the door).
For the indication of the signals one indicator board for both rectifiers can be used.
Battery manufacturers specification regarding charging voltage, maximum voltage ripples,
etc. shall strictly be observed, as well as values given in the data sheets.
The rectifier shall be equipped with the following supervisory devices:

15 Mar, 2011
electronic network supervisory (switching off at 85 % voltage; switching on at 90 %

voltage),
overvoltage supervisory with switching off the rectifier,
over-discharging supervisory with disconnection of the battery,
supervisory of battery circuit interrupt and short circuit of battery cells,
earth fault supervisory on DC side,
The response of the mentioned supervisory devices shall be indicated on the indicator board.
Inverter
The UPSs shall be equipped with full electronically inverters. The inverter of one
rectifier/inverter circuit shall be located in the cabinet of the respective rectifier.
Each inverter shall be suitable to supply all connected consumers.
The inverters shall be designed for operation with natural air cooling.
Each inverter shall mainly consist of the following:
self commutating solid-state static inverter unit with voltage regulation,

filters for wave form stabilisation,
voltage peak limiting,
synchronization device,
molded case circuit breakers for AC,
miniature circuit breakers for control circuits,
Indicator board for all signals of inverter (if not part of indicator board of rectifier).
The inverters shall be sized in a manner such that circuit breakers for consumers with 25 A
nominal current (B-characteristic) will trip without any difficulties and without support from
bypass.
The inverter shall be equipped with the following supervisory devices:
input voltage supervisory,
electronic inverter supervisory,
output voltage supervisory, which initiates a switch over to static bypass,
overload supervisory,
Frequency supervisory.
The response of the mentioned supervisory devices shall be indicated on the indicator board.

15 Mar, 2011
2.08 Bypass
For the inverters an electronically change over device shall be provided. The device shall
enable the automatic, uninterrupted, synchronous switch-over to the consumer bus bar in
case of failure.
The change-over device provided shall be equipped with thyristor switches, control
electronics and a check-out-system. The check-out system must make it possible to test the
correct functioning of the unit without disturbing the operation of the consumers.
For change-over in case of maintenance an additional, manual bypass shall be provided. The
switch-over shall be carried out with overlapping, that means without interrupt, too.
The operation of bypass shall be indicated on the mimic panel, a summary and fault alarm on
the indicator panel of inverter.
The automatic and manual bypass shall be fed via a common isolation transformer, which will
be supplied from the normal network.
2.09 Measuring Instruments
The UPSs shall be equipped with the following measuring instruments:

AC input voltage (per rectifier and for bypass),
battery current (charging / discharging),
battery voltage,
AC output current.
The measuring instruments shall be mounted in the front door.
Mimic Panel
For the uninterruptible power supply a colored mimic panel shall be provided.
The mimic panel/diagram shall show the main power circuit with all necessary switch
positions, device symbols and important alarms.
All measuring instruments shall be allocated to the respective symbols of devices and bus
bars.
The signals which are incorporated in the mimic panel may not be indicated on the indicator
boards.
Remote Monitoring
For remote monitoring to station control system the following signals shall be wired on
terminal strip:
failure feeder of rectifier (for each rectifier),
failure feeder of bypass,

15 Mar, 2011
over-discharging of battery,
summary alarm per rectifier/inverter unit,
Summary alarm bypass.
The transfer of the mentioned signals shall be carried out via potential free contacts.
2.10 Batteries
The batteries shall be from the lead-acid type. Batteries shall be gel-filled and maintenance-
free. All batteries shall be clearly marked to show manufacturers name, type, voltage,
capacity, etc.
If the back-up time is not otherwise specified in the data sheets, the sizing of battery system
shall be made in a manner such that in case of loss of power the complete consumer loads
will be supplied from the batteries continuously for a duration of minimum three (3) hours and
it shall be guaranteed that the cell voltage of any single cell will not fall below 1.8 V during at
the end of the minimum back-up time. The AH capacity calculation shall be performed for
maximum load demand at ambient temperature of 25 C. During on-site battery test the
above mentioned performance data shall be proved.
Manufacturer to confirm that minimum life expectancy of batteries will not be less than 12
15 years after commissioning of the same at site.
The batteries shall be placed inside a battery room on rack.
Between batteries and rectifier/inverter cabinets a respective fuse box shall be installed. The
fuse box may be placed either inside the battery room or inside the neighboring room on the
wall to the battery room. The cables between battery and fuse box shall be laid short circuit
proof.
For each uninterruptible power supply a distribution board shall be provided.

The distribution board shall be located in a separated part of one rectifier/inverter cabinet. If
the cabinet is not sufficient for distribution board installation or if inside of the cabinet is no
space, a separate cabinet shall be foreseen.
The distribution boards shall be equipped with 2-pole miniature circuit breaker, sized
according to the requirements and with the respective terminal stripes.
Further, an earth fault supervision unit shall be provided. For future extension each
distribution board shall have at least 20 % full installed spare and further 20 % spare place to
install additional devices.
In addition, the bus bars of distribution boards shall be equipped with the following measuring
instruments:
voltmeter,
Frequency meter.

15 Mar, 2011
The measuring instruments shall be mounted in the front door. The response of the earth fault
supervision shall be shown on the indicator board of the rectifier.
For remote monitoring the summary alarm of moulded case circuit breaker tripping shall be
wired on terminal stripe.
The transfer of the mentioned signal shall be carried out via potential free contact.
The terminals shall be located beside the terminal stripes for remote monitoring of
rectifier/inverter unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Wiring
requirements. The wires shall be adequately rated and equipped with fuses/circuit breakers of
adequate size.
The wiring colors and the minimum cross sections shall be according to specification Design
and Construction of Power Supply Systems.
All circuits and auxiliary contacts shall be terminated on terminal strips. Terminal strips shall
have at least 10 % spare terminals. If wires with different potential will be terminated on one
terminal strip the respective terminals shall be separated by means of isolating plates. The
termination of multiple stranded wires has to be carried out by means of multiple core cable
ends.
connection point.
3.02 Overvoltage Protection
The UPS shall be designed in a manner such that overvoltages caused by switching and
flashes, do not impair the safety in operation of the units.
The incomers of UPS and the bus bar of the distribution boards shall be equipped with
additionally overvoltage protectors. The electronic devices shall be separately protected
against overvoltages.
3.03 PAINTING

15 Mar, 2011

3.04 CABLES AND CABLE LAYING
For the cable connections between the different parts of the UPS equipment,
PVC insulated copper cables shall be used. The cable connections between rectifiers and
batteries shall be carried out with single core cables.
The cables shall be selected according to nominal voltage, voltage drop and short circuit
current. The minimum cross section for power and signal cables shall be according to
Signal cables shall be provided with copper screen.
3.05 INSTALLATIONS
The delivery, installation and commissioning of the UPS equipment shall include, but not
limited to the following items:
Table connections between the different parts of UPS equipment,
Grounding and potential equalization for the parts, including connection with the next
grounding bus bars,
Termination of all cables at the UPS equipment,
Commissioning of the functioning UPS equipment,
Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during installation and
commissioning phase and during training on site.
3.06 Workshop Tests
All components of the UPS equipment shall be tested completely and detailed in
manufacturers workshop. The batteries may be tested separately. All tests required by the
codes and standards as well as all manufactures tests have to be performed.
the tests.

15 Mar, 2011

Check of protection against touching,
Mechanical operation test on all equipment,
Operation test of the relays, releasers and measuring equipment,
Tripping of circuit breakers,
Insulation and dielectric test,
3.07 Site Tests

pre-commissioning (including loop testing),
commissioning and test on completion,
Performance test including battery capacity test.
3.08 DOCUMENTATION

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the UPS equipment and their
components.
The documentation of the UPS equipment shall include the following documents and
a) Technical data sheets
b) Layout drawings for all devices, cabinets and racks
c) Schedules
d) Single line diagrams
e) Block diagrams
f) Wiring diagrams
g) Termination drawings
h) Cable lists

15 Mar, 2011
i) Spare parts list

j) List of used devices with manufacturer
k) Software and software description (if any)
l) Operation and maintenance manual
m) Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.
Special attention has to be given to the fact that documentation must be submitted with
sufficient time allocated for approval prior to manufacturing /assembly.
absence of relevant details in those standards the DIN standards shall apply.
with the Client.
3.09 SHIPPING
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged. All parts of one
uninterruptible power supply should be shipped as a common delivery. The material,
especially loose parts and spare parts shall be clearly labeled according to the designation.
3.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
All necessary special tools for operation and maintenance of the UPS equipment shall be
supplied for each location, at least consisting of:
1 set of all special tools required for operation and maintenance of UPS equipment,
key set for cabinet doors and locks,
magnetic warning labels in sufficient number, English and Arabic,
software for special equipment (if any),
One (1) IC pro-programming kit (suitable for all IC in the system).
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16003
VALVE ACTUATERS




Page 1 of 13
ELECTRICAL WORKS VALVE ACTUATERS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Selection of Actuators
2.02 Components and Equipments
2.03 Tagging
2.05 Motor Operated Valve Actuators
2.06 Hydraulic Operated Valve Actuators\
2.07 Accessories
2.09 External Gear Box
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Marking
3.02 Painting
3.03 Installation
3.04 Workshop Test
3.05 Site Test
3.06 Documentation
3.07 Shipping

TRANSPORTATION OF TREATED WATER FROM TAIF TO MAADEN MINE SITE Page 2 of 13
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
This document covers the requirements for the design, manufacturing, installation, test and
commissioning of valve actuators for the Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to
Maaden Gold Mines.
The design, manufacturing, installation, test and commissioning of motor and hydraulic
operated valve actuators shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at
least. The latest revision of the publication referred to shall apply.
IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages
IEC 60534 Industrial-process control valves
ASME Section VIII, Unfired pressure vessels
contract.
1.03 Submittals

15 Mar, 2011

for:

building lines.

installed.


instructions.

instructions.
The valve actuators shall be designed and constructed for intermitted operation at full load

15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Selection of Actuators
In general it shall be the responsibility of the driven equipment manufacturer to select and co-
ordinate the required actuator type. This includes the co-ordination of the performance data
as also the mechanical construction and coupling requirements.
The valve closing speed shall be in a rate of 300 mm/min, unless otherwise specified. The
speed of actuators for control valves must be according to the purpose of these valves.
The actuators shall entirely be suitable for the duty intended (opening and closing of valves)
under the maximum differential pressures. If not specified otherwise the actual power output
of the actuators must be selected to meet the maximum required torque, multiplied by a factor
of 1.25.
The actuators shall be suitable to operate at nominal output power with the voltage drops as
described in the specification Design and Construction of Power Supply Systems.
Actuators which will be mounted on valves for pipelines with cathodic protection must be
electrically isolated from the valve by means of isolation joints. The joints shall be integrated
in the driving shaft.
guaranteed.
2.03 Tagging
environmental conditions.

15 Mar, 2011

2.05 Motor Operated Valve Actuator
General
The motor operated valve actuators shall be consist of the following main parts
electrical motor,
gear with handwheel,
control unit,
Valve connection according to ISO 5210.
All parts of the actuator shall be assembled to a integral unit, suitable for direct mounting on
the valve.
Motor and Gear
The electric actuator motors shall be of the squirrel cage three phase induction types, for
operation from a three-phase power supply of 400V AC, 60 Hz and is to be sized for short
time operation of minimum 15 min including 20 starts.
The motor shall be suitable for direct on line starting and shall be capable of operating the
valve under all the specified conditions with 80% of rated voltage at the terminals, without
exceeding the permissible temperature rise in any part of the motor. The motor windings shall
have class F insulation with a temperature rise limited to class B. The protection against
overheating shall be an integral part of the motor.
The drive shall be through a gearbox, which incorporates a clutch mechanism to allow manual
operation of the valve via a handwheel. The handwheel shall be permanently connected, and
may be integral, bolted or clamped. It shall be the locking type with a declutching mechanism.
The operating force shall be limited to 245 N (25kgf) at the rim of the wheel. The handwheel
must be lockable.
A local, mechanical valve position indicator shall be provided within the actuator body.

15 Mar, 2011
Control Unit
The control unit shall mainly consist of the following devices:

reversing contactor starter with all necessary accessories,
control transformer,
anti-condensation heating, powered from internal supply,
adjustable torque switches for both rotating directions,
min. two (2) limit switches for open position, each equipped with 1NO+1NC contact,
min. two (2) limit switches for closed position, each equipped with 1NO+1NC contact,
min. two (2) limit switches, easily and independently adjustable for any position of valve
travel, each equipped with 1NO+1NC contact,
local control station with the functions Open/Stop/Close,
selector switch for the operation modes Local/Off/Remote, lockable with pad or key lock,
Electronically position indicator, 4 20 mA (only for actuators of control valves).
The contacts shall be potential free and suitable for 250 VAC, 1.5 A and 60 VDC, 1 A
respectively.
All wiring shall be brought to an easily accessible, segregated terminal board.
The wires must be suitable labeled according to the wiring diagram.
Cable entries shall be threaded ISO to suit cable size. In minimum three (3) entries with cable
gland must be provided.
If specified, the actuators may be of the intelligent type with control via Data Hiway with
position feed back to the station control system. Intelligent actuator shall be provided with
isolator switches, which isolate the actuator but maintain the Hiway to permit maintenance of
the actuator.
2.06 Hydraulic Operated Valve Actuators
General
The hydraulic actuator shall be of a double acting piston type and provided with a connection
for an external hydraulic power unit or shall be combined unit (actuator and hydraulic power
unit).
Double acting piston operators shall employ a five port two position solenoid operated shuttle
valve. The shuttle valve shall be of sufficient capacity to ensure that the valve can be
operated in the required time.

15 Mar, 2011
All tubing shall be in 316 stainless steel with a outer diameter of 12 mm and a wall thickness
of 1.5 mm. All tube bending shall be carried out cold by gradually applied pressure using an
approved type-bending machine. Bending shall not include hammering or the application of
any force, which may damage the tube.
Tube cutting shall be executed using an approved type tube cutter, saw cuts are not to be
made. After cutting, the ends shall be dressed with the appropriate tool to ensure that a
restriction has not been introduced. Prior to installation, the tubing shall be internally cleaned,
degreased with a suitable solvent and then dried.
Cable entries shall be threaded ISO to suit cable size.
Hydraulic Power Unit and Accumulators
The nominal level of feeding voltage is 400 V, 60 Hz. The supply will be carried out via one
(1) moulded case circuit breaker or a fuse, situated in a distribution board. All other elements
for control voltage distribution, etc. must be located inside the actuator.
Instrumentation within the hydraulic power unit shall relate to the monitoring and control of the
power pack unit and shall be as simple as possible and be of the minimum consistent with the
requirements for reliability and safety.
Redundant components such as dual filter regulators and dual strainers shall be provided to
enhance overall system reliability. No single fault shall prevent operation of the system or
cause shutdown of the control equipment fed by the hydraulic power pack.
The motor for the hydraulic pump to generate the required pressure in the hydraulic system
shall be of the squirrel cage three phase induction types.
The motor must be equipped with all associated elements for:
electrical protection of the motor,
start/stop facilities (contactor) controlled by local hydraulic pressure,
on/off switch,
local indicator for power supply and availability,
Potential free contacts for remote failure annunciation.
At minimum two junction boxes shall be provided, one for power connection, one for status
signals transmission.
The system must be provided with sufficient number of accumulators to permit two (2) power
strokes of the actuator without the need to recharge the accumulators. Hydraulic
accumulators shall be of the bladder type forged construction. Material of construction shall
be steel.
The hydraulic system shall be fitted with the necessary pressure gauges, switches, and relief
valves to ensure safe reliable operation.
The following electrical instrumentation is required as a minimum:

pressure switches for pump on/off control, set point adjustable,

15 Mar, 2011
pressure switches for oil pressure low remote signal, set point adjustable,
level switch for oil level maximum and minimum remote signal,
Local pressure gauge.
The type of pressure gauge shall be bourdon tube in stainless steel (nominal size 160 mm,
accuracy class 1.0, scaled in bar) with liquid filling and laminated safety glass window. The
range and working pressure must be according to hydraulic system pressure.
The contacts shall be potential free and suitable for 250 VAC, 1.5 A and 60 VDC, 1 A
respectively. All switches are to be housed in enclosures of stainless steel.
All signals for remote control must be cabled up and terminated to local junction box included
the scope of supply. Wiring and termination as well as internal cables, cable glands etc. have
to be in accordance with the relevant applicable specifications for e.g. Cables and Cable
Laying.
Each Hydraulic Power Unit cabinet shall be stainless steel and fully insulated.
Hydraulic System shall be provided with hand pump to allow the valves to be operated in the
event of pressurization failure.
Hydraulic reservoirs where provided shall be certified and stamped in accordance with ASME
VIII Div. 1 and shall be supplied with ASME VIII certified and stamped pressure relief valves
and also pressure gauges.
2.07 Accessories
Accessories such as solenoid valves, pressure pilots, relays, etc., shall be supplied and
mounted by manufacturer.
The actuator shall be equipped with solenoid valves pending on the functionality, fail safe or
normal operation, of the valve with a coil rating of 230 VAC. Integral terminals must be
provided for the termination of cabling. Flying leads from the coil enclosure are not allowed.
Solenoid valves shall be 316 stainless steel bodies and trim as standard. Solenoid valves
shall have 1/4 NPT (F) connections and 6 mm orifice as a minimum, and shall be selected to
ensure that the specified control stroking times can be achieved.
For control valves subject to vibrations the solenoid valves must be separately mounted and
not on the valve. Solenoid valves shall be mounted between actuator and position indicator.
The actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. The position indicators must be
installed directly on the valve stem such that they show valve position rather than actuator
position.
For remote control the following devices are to be installed:

two (2) limit switches for open position, each equipped with 1NO+1NC contact,
two (2) limit switches for closed position, each equipped with 1NO+1NC contact,
Electronically position indicator, 4 20 mA (only for actuators of control valves).

15 Mar, 2011
The devices shall be properly installed and protected against mechanical damage and/or
malfunction. Sensors and switches must be pre-cabled to a junction box mounted on the
actuator using 20 mm metallic glands. Cable connection shall also be in metric sizes.
The sensors and switches are to be located such that accidental actuation is not possible,
including movements caused by wear. They shall be unaffected by vibration. Adjustment
facilities shall be locked after setting by drilling and pinning.
Actuators junction boxes shall be made from 316 stainless steel. Cables shall be clearly
identified at both ends using securely fitted PVC cable markers. All cable cores and wiring
shall be fitted with core identification ferrules at each end. All cores shall be terminated in
terminals.
maintenance issues.
2.09 External Gear Box
For larger valves, ball valves or where required for other reasons, between actuator and valve
a oil bath or grease lubricated gear box shall be placed.
The gear unit shall have the following features:

self-locking mechanism,
valve position indicator, visible from a distance of 20 m,
internal limit stops,
provisions for lubrication and drain
The body shall be of cast iron, preferably.
The connections should be according to ISO 5210 and/or ISO 5211. The installation of a
handwheel with locking devise instead an actuator must be possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Marking
All actuators shall be fitted with a permanently attached stainless steel labels (not wired-on)
showing as a minimum the following information:
manufacturers name,

15 Mar, 2011
model & serial numbers,

instrument tag number,
manufacturers standard data,
Position on actuation medium failure.
In addition, the nameplate shall give the actuator design torque.
3.02 Painting
The painting shall be as per the approved manufacturer standard at least consisting of:
one coat of two-component epoxy zinc chromate rust-inhibiting primer,
one intermediate coat of two-component epoxy primer,
Two top coatings for two-component resin, colour as per the approved colour code
schedule.
Total thickness of dry protective paint coating shall be at least 120 m.
3.03 INSTALLATION
Installation and alignment shall be carried out in accordance with the instructions and
recommendations of the valve manufacturer.
3.04 Workshop Tests
All valve actuators shall be tested completely and detailed in manufacturers workshop. All
tests required by the codes and standards as well as all manufactures tests have to be
performed. After installation of the actuators on the valves, respective tests and the
adjustment shall be carried out.
The test program for the work shop test has to be submitted prior to start of the tests in
compliance with the Project Procedure Manual.
Complete tests on valve actuators will normally not be required if respective type tests
certificates are available.
Detailed test protocols of all tests performed have to be submitted prior to installation.

15 Mar, 2011
3.05 Site Tests

Pre-installation testing,
Pre-commissioning (including Loop Testing),
Test runs,
Performance tests.
The aim of the tests is to ensure and prove the proper function of the complete scope.
3.06 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the valve actuators and its
components.
The documentation of motors shall include the following documents and drawings (minimum
requirements):
a) Layout drawings
b) Wiring diagrams
c) Termination drawings
d) Technical data sheets
e) Calculations, protocols, certificates
f) Spare parts list
g) Performance curves
h) Operation and maintenance manual
i) Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.

of the signed protocols in electronic form, too. The type of the electronic files shall be agreed
with the Client.

15 Mar, 2011
3.07 Shipping
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged and shall be shipped as
a common delivery. The material, especially loose parts and spare parts shall be clearly
labeled according to the designation.
Actuators shall be coupled with the respective valve before shipping.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS




Page 1 of 19
ELECTRICAL WORKS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.02 Standards
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 System Characteristics
2.02 Design and Construction Requirements
2.03 Wiring
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
3.02 Installation Requirements
3.03 Battery Limits
3.04 Shipping
3.05 Storage Upon Arrival
3.06 Acceptance and Testing
3.07 Maintanace
3.08 Spare Parts
3.09 Documentation

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
This specification covers the general and overall requirements for design, manufacturing,
construction, installation and test of the electrical power supply systems for Transportation of
Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold mine sites.
1.02 Standards
The electrical power supply systems must be designed, manufactured and erected according
to the relevant codes, standards, rules and regulations as listed below, all in latest valid
edition:
IEC- Recommendations (International Electrotechnical Commission)

IEEE- Codes (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering)
ISO- International Organization for Standardization
SI- International System of Units
SASO- Saudi Arabian Standards Organization as far as applicable for equipment
direct purchased in the KSA (Kingdom of Saudi Arabia)
SEC- Codes standards, rules and regulations of the Saudi Electricity Company as
far as required for electrical power feeding interface
HCISS- Security and Safety Directives (High Commission for Industrial Security and
Safety)
The individual code numbers of the particular standards, rules or regulations are listed in the
respective equipment specification and/or in the relevant chapters of this specification. As far
as authority permits require additional codes and standards, respectively impose additional
requirements, these are also part of the contract.
Other standards or regulations will only be allowed for specific equipment or systems, if not
covered by any of the above listed standards. However, all such other standards are subject
of approval by the Engineer.
The equipment for the electrical power supply systems shall be designed and constructed for
continuous operation at full load under the given climatic and environmental conditions.
The environmental conditions will be classified as follows:
a) Outdoor Conditions
Design temperature max. + 80 C
max. + 50 C (shade)
min. 0 C
Relative Humidity up to 100 %
Altitude from sea level up to 1600 m above sea level
Wind load up to 160 km/h

15 Mar, 2011
All equipment and materials provided for outdoor installation shall be resistant against
the prevailing climatic conditions, sand, sand storms and strong sun radiation. In
general all outdoor equipment must be equipped with sun and rain protection cover or
shed.
b) Indoor Conditions
For electrical rooms in general air conditioning will be provided. Only in pump buildings
and other technical buildings ventilation is foreseen. The temperature in the various
rooms depends on the room classification for air conditioning and ventilation (see
General Specification for Project and Works).
In ventilated buildings the equipment shall be suitable for a design temperature of +55
C. The design temperature for electrical equipment installed in air conditioned rooms
shall be +40 C suitable for operation even if the HVAC equipment fails.
The switchgears shall have type test certificates corresponding to 40C as per IEC.
However, the manufacturer shall include a suitable de-rating factor to allow operation
at 50C.
For areas with increased environmental conditions, such as water sprays, aggressive
or hazardous atmosphere, the power supply equipment shall be specially protected as
outlined in item Mechanical Protection and in the detailed specifications.
Areas with possible water sprays are pump houses and other buildings/rooms
equipped with process equipment, valve shafts, equipment/instrument shafts, etc.
Areas with aggressive and dangerous atmosphere are in the chlorination buildings.
Areas with hazardous atmosphere are in the Diesel storage tank shaft and in the
emergency diesel room at the diesel day tank.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 System Characteristics
Main Supply Network
The specific network feeder configurations and contract limits for the various stations of the
Project are shown in the respective single line diagrams.
Voltage Levels
The applicable main supply network voltages are as follows:
33 kV
13.8 kV
4.16 kV
480/230/120 V.

15 Mar, 2011
The operating and control voltage levels are as follows:
480 V 10% main distribution, pump motors, feeder voltage of

variable speed drive (at Transfer Pump Station STP Taif)
4.16 kV 10% main distribution, pump motors, feeder voltage of

variable speed drive (at Master Pump Station 56km or
70 km from STP Taif)
480 V 10% main distribution, pump motors, feeder voltage of

variable speed drive (at Ad-Duaihi Storage Facility)
480/230V 10% process equipment, building installation, HVAC, auxiliary

systems
230/120V 10% Lighting & Power outlets
230V AC 5% Uninterrable power supply for process, control

equipment, control and signal voltage
24V DC 5% solar power supply voltage for remote stations, if

applicable
The grounding of the power supply networks shall be as follows:
33 kV, 138 Kv supply network according to the SEC regulations
4.16 kV main distribution network, as per particular requirement

(At Master Pumping Station 56 km or 70 km from STP
Taif)
13.8 kV / 480 V Transformer star point solidly grounded (at STP Taif)
33 kV / 4.16 kV transformer star point solidly grounded (at Master Pump

Station)
4.16 kV / 480 V Transformer star point solidly grounded (at Master Pump
Station)
230 V AC not grounded, earth fault monitoring
If the 33 kV / 13.8 kV network will be installed in stations or at areas where this voltage level
already exists, the grounding of the new network shall be the same as for the existing facilities.
Voltage Drop
The allowable voltage drop for all power supply sources shall be in the range of 5% .

15 Mar, 2011
Frequency
The frequency for all alternating power supply sources shall be 60 Hz 5 %.
Short-Circuit Power
The short-circuit power for the various power supply parts and components have to be
calculated on basis of the available short circuit power of the feeding network and shall
comply with standard values only.
Future extension might be considered as indicated on the detail single line diagrams.
The Contractor will be responsible to make the necessary inquiries and shall base the final
design on these results.
The network data, if given in the relevant Tender Contract Documents, are indicative only.
Power Factor
The overall power factor of the station equipment on the interface to the supply network shall
be better or at least equal to 0.90 at rated load. If necessary, power factor compensation
equipment shall be provided as part of the contract.
System Grounding
The stations will be equipped with an equipotentially meshed grounding network. All exposed
conductive parts or elements of the station systems will be connected to this network, in
detail:
electrical equipment,
electric motors, pumps and other machinery,
metallic frame works, structures, walkways, etc.,
vessels and all kinds of metallic containers,
metallic framework of buildings and houses,
metallic reinforcement of concrete foundations,
The grounding network must be designed and constructed in compliance with the
specification Earthing and Lightning Protection, the supporting grounding calculations shall
be performed by Contractor.
The earth resistance of the overall interconnected station grounding network shall not exceed
1 . For line valve stations a maximum earth resistance of 2 will be accepted.
For the water storage tanks cathodic protection system the direct low-ohmic grounding of
tanks and with the tank connected electrical equipment is not permitted. For this application
respective isolation joints for instruments, actuators, etc. shall be used.
Lightning Protection

15 Mar, 2011
All buildings and exposed high structures of the complete system shall be equipped with static
lightning protection system. The lightning protection system shall be designed and
constructed in compliance with the specification Earthing and Lightning Protection.
Electrical Protection
All electrical equipment must be protected against direct contact, indirect contact, over
voltage, under voltage, over current, earth fault, transformer buchholz relay, loss of field,
reverse power, differential potential, thermal protection, and short circuit in normal service and
in case of a fault in accordance with the relevant IEC regulations.
Installations up to 1000 V will be protected by use of protective multiple earthing (neutral

conductor and separate protective conductor). For special application the differential current
earth-leakage protection shall be used.
The neutral conductor and the protective conductor must be interconnected in the main LV
MCC only. The TN-C-S network distribution system in accordance with IEC shall be applied.
The electrical protection for high and medium voltage systems above 1000 V must be
designed on basis of the given medium voltage network grounding conditions. Earth fault
supervision/monitoring must be provided for all ungrounded medium voltage networks.
The electrical installation of buildings, including the protection for safety must follow the
requirements defined in IEC 60364.
Harmonics
Generally the harmonic content of the alternate circuits at the supply network side must be
reduced as much as possible. The Contractor has to provide a detailed investigation and
calculation based on the actual network conditions at each site and considering all installed
equipment which may produce harmonic distortion.
The design and study with respect to the harmonic load content and harmonic distortion in the
power supply system shall be subject to approval. Limits of harmonic distortion shall comply
with the requirements of approved international standards and
SEC requirements. However, the total voltage distortion at the worst case location of the 13.8
kV side shall not exceed 2.5 %, if the SEC requirements are not more stringent.
All necessary fixed installed components and equipments necessary to achieve above
mentioned limits must be provided and are part of the contract.
Mechanical Protection
Depending on the installation and application, the following degrees of protection for
enclosures, in line with IEC 60529, are required for the various electrical equipments.
The following table is to be considered as guideline for minimum requirements. The finally

15 Mar, 2011
selected degrees of protection for enclosures of each individual equipment and material are
subject of approval.
The degrees of protection for lighting fixtures with accessories and electrical installation
material for buildings is included in the specification Electrical Installation for Buildings and in
the specification Outdoor Lighting. Forward to the Company Representative for review and
approval the following submittals. Refer also to appropriate specification sections for other
submittal requirements.
* For rooms with HVAC and without water pipes only
** For submersible pumps
For switchgear extensions the IP class of the existing switchgear shall be applied.
Equipment Internal, dry Internal with Outdoor Below

locations* possible water ground/
sprays/ damp shafts
MV switchgears IP 41 -- -- --
LV main distribution boards IP 41 -- -- --
LV sub distribution boards IP 41 IP 54 IP 54 IP 55
UPS rectifier and inverter
IP 21 -- -- --
cabinets
UPS distribution boards IP 41 IP 54 IP 54 IP 55
MV motors -- IP 55 IP54 --
MV motor terminal boxes -- IP55 IP54 --
LV motors IP 54 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55/IP58**
LV motor terminal boxes IP54 IP55 IP55 IP55/IP58**
Motor operated valve
-- IP 67 IP 67 IP 67
actuators
Hydraulic operated valve
-- IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
actuators
Equipment terminal boxes IP 31 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
Junction boxes IP 55 IP 55 IP 65 IP 67
Interference and Electromagnetic Compatibility
For design and construction special care is required to avoid all negative effects of high
voltage interference caused by:
High voltage installations

High voltage cable systems
Other high voltage equipment or sources
All necessary precaution and counter measures must be considered for design and layout of
the equipment. For limits of interference and protective measure the requirements of IEC
61000.

15 Mar, 2011
Equipment shall be type tested in accordance with the following criteria and shall show normal
performance within the specification limits after the tests:
Immunity against electrical fast transient/bursts acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 test

severity level 4
Immunity against interference of static electricity acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
sharpness grade 4
Immunity against electromagnetic fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 sharpness
grade 3
In addition it is the responsibility of the Contractor that all components and systems delivered
within his scope will properly work under the actual conditions prevailing at the location of
installations without any disturbance or malfunction and do not influence other equipment in
an not allowed way.
Radio Interference Suppression
Radio interference suppression for all equipment and devices shall be grad N.
Hazardous Protection
All electrical equipment and components, including their installations which are located in
hazardous areas (e.g. diesel storage tanks, EMG diesel day tanks, etc.) must be in
compliance with the requirements of the applicable IEC Ex-standards.
2.02 Design and Construction Requirements
General
In addition to the requirements specified in the Tender Contract Documents and in the
individual specifications, the following applies in general for all equipment and components of
the power supply systems.
The electrical power supply systems including their various components shall be designed,
manufactured and installed in such a way that they are able to withstand during full load
operation under the given climatic design conditions, the rated currents continuously as well
as the maximum expected short circuit interrupting currents and instantaneous short circuit
currents in terms of thermal and mechanical stress without any damage, dislocation or
dangerous temperature rise.
easy maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and long maintenance intervals. Standard
industrial high performance systems and components of suppliers standard lists shall be
used as far as possible. Components and equipment of same kind and type shall be selected
for equivalent functions.
The electrical equipment, as transformers, low voltage boards, cables, etc. shall be calculated

15 Mar, 2011
including an available spare capacity of 20 % in rating and for number of equipment feeders,
as far as not otherwise specified in the detailed specifications or indicated on drawings.
Mechanical Construction of Cubicles, Cabinets, Panels and Switchboards

The doors of the different cabinets, panels and switchboards must be equipped with a uniform
key lock system, consisting of:
door handle with locking bolts, to keep the door in the closed position
key system to lock the door
The MV equipment shall have different keys than the LV equipment. The proposed key-lock
system must be approved by the Engineer and the Client. The uniformity of the key-lock
system with the various equipment manufacturers will have to be coordinated by the
Contractor. The keys shall be sorted in each electrical/equipment room in suitable key boxes,
lockable by pad-lock.
All cubicles, cabinets, panels and boards must be protected against dripping water from the
top. Pressure relief and ventilation openings on the top of the panels must be designed
accordingly.
The live parts inside each cabinet, cubicle and board must be adequately protected in order to
prevent accidental touching during checking and routine maintenance.
Each cabinet shall have its own lighting fixture installed inside, automatic switch on/off shall
be provided by opening/closing the door. In addition at least one (1) socket outlet for 230 V
AC shall be installed in each cabinet. Space heating devices with humidity control shall be
provided.
Cable entry into the cubicles, cabinets, panels and boards is in general from the bottom, if not
defined otherwise in the respective detailed specification or in the data sheets.
2.03 Wiring
For internal wiring circuits in the various cubicles, cabinets, panels and boards, in general
PVC insulated single core, stranded copper conductors with the following minimum conductor
cross-sections shall be used:
power circuits (acc. to rated current and at least 2.5 mm or 4 mm voltage drop)
measuring circuits 2.5 mm
auxiliary power circuits 1.5 mm
control signaling and annunciation circuits 1.5 mm
for prefabricated control modules, e.g. LV
drawers or speed regulation components 0.75 -1.0 mm
(agreement by Engineer necessary)
For the individual voltage levels the following colors of the PVC insulated conductors
shall be used:

15 Mar, 2011
400/230 V AC black or black/brown/black (phase) blue (neutral)

green/yellow (protective conductor)
230 V AC black or brown (phase) blue (neutral)green/yellow

(protective conductor)
24 V DC red (+), black (-)
Other voltages grey or manufacturers standard
All wires and cables including control wiring within cubicles, cabinets, panels and boards shall
be clearly tagged on both ends with permanent type wire/cable markers, in conformity with
the wiring and termination diagrams, showing the respective equipment terminal number.
The control, signal and alarm circuits must be wired separately and protected by individual
miniature circuit breakers or fuses within the various cabinets. For connection with the power
supply source no looping is allowed, that means if one relay, etc. will be disconnected from
the power supply wires the other consumers must remain active without tripping.
Cables and Bus Bars
For detailed construction and design requirements of cables reference is made to IEC 60227,
IEC 60287 and IEC 60502.
The cross-section calculation for cables and bus bars must be in accordance with the values
for short circuit levels, maximum permissible voltage drops, current capacities and the
reducing factors.
Unless otherwise specified the current carrying capacity of cables shall be as follows:
Transformer feeding cables shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the
transformer rated current. For fan-cooled transformers the higher fan-cooled
rating must be used.
Cables feeding bus bar system shall have a current carrying capacity equal to
the design current rating foreseen for the bus bars.
Cables feeding a bus bar system, divided into sections and connected by
tiebreakers shall have a current carrying capacity such as to withstand the
maximum load demand of both bus bar sections.
The motor feeding cables shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the
motor rated current.
All the remaining cables not mentioned above shall have a current carrying
capacity equal to the maximum rated current demand of the connected
equipment.
The cables for voltage above 1000 V shall be sized in such a way as to withstand without
injury the effects of overheating due to short circuits during the time provided for the tripping

15 Mar, 2011
of circuit breakers immediately up stream of these cables. Further, the sizing of these cables
shall consider the fault clearing time of the back-up protection.
The maximum short circuit level multiplied by a safety factor of 1.25 shall be used for cable
sizing.
The cable conductors shall have the following minimum cross section:
low voltage power cables 2.5 mm

cables for lighting circuits 2.5 mm
high and medium voltage cables 70 mm
control cables 1.5 mm
instrumentation cables 0.75 mm (stranded)
Telecommunication cables 0.8 mm (wire diameter)
The cross-section calculation shall be based on the following max. permissible conductor
temperature of the various cable types:
PVC insulated cables 70C

XLPE insulated cables 90C
Reducing factors for cable cross-section calculation depending on the laying
areas and conditions shall be applied as defined in IEC 60287, considering:
laying below ground or above ground,
underground soil temperature up to 35C - 40C,
ambient air temperature up to 55C,
load factors
number of multiple core or single core three-phase cable systems in one trench
or/on one tray,
Thermal resistivity of soil for direct buried cables of max 120C cm/W after
cable installation shall be provided. For cable sizing calculations 240C cm/W
shall be assumed.
All power cables shall have the standard IEC color coding. If the cables will be purchased in
KSA and the standard IEC color coding is not available, the wire colors Red, Yellow, Blue,
and Black (neutral) will be also allowed.
Cable connection to the respective switchboards, cubicles, panels and motor terminal boxes
must be possible in an easy and safe way. The terminal boxes, terminals and connection
racks must be designed for the number, size and type of cables, cores and wires.
For further details, reference is made to the specification Cables and Cable Laying.
Voltage Drops
The voltage drop for the various parts of the electrical system shall be held within the values
indicated in the following table. The values are referred to the nominal voltage of the system.
The voltage drop calculations in case of re-acceleration of a group of motors after a short
voltage drop shall be based on the short circuit impedance value of the motors.

15 Mar, 2011
The permissible maximum overall worst case voltage drops shall be as follows:
at the consumer terminals at rated power 5%

at the motor terminals during start up 12 %
supply cables for lighting and no-break equipment 2%
supply cables for distribution boards at rated power 2%
at the bus bar of distribution boards during start up of largest motor 12 %
The voltage available at the motor terminals during start up will in any case be adequate to
ensure the start-up or re-acceleration of the motor (even at full load where required) without
damage of the motor.
The maximum start-up voltage drop of 15 % is the sum of voltage drop in the cables, the bus
bars and transformers for motor feeding.
Instruments
For all instruments and indicators necessary for control and monitoring of the power supply
equipment, in general the metric SI-system shall be used for scales.
Local Control Stations
For each low voltage or medium voltage motor a local control station shall be provided, which
is to be placed closed to the respective motor.
Regarding the function of the motor (with or without supervision from the station control
system) the local control station will be connected directly with the station control system or
with the supplying distribution board.
The local control station shall consist of the following operation elements:
key-operated switch for activation of control station,

push button for motor On,
push button for motor Off.
If necessary for special machines (e.g. machines with open, rotating devices) the control
station shall be equipped with an emergency push button. This push button must also be
activated, if the control station is not in operation.
Signalling
For external signaling circuits between local field mounted panels and equipment to boards
and cabinets within the buildings, as also signalization circuits between boards and panels
inside the buildings in general 230 V AC shall be used.
Internal annunciation and signaling lamp circuits can be supplied by 24 V AC/DC. In this case,

15 Mar, 2011
the 24V power packs for internal circuits shall be incorporated in the various cubicles,
cabinets, boards and panels and will be fed from the 230 V AC UPS system.
In general all signal lamps shall be of the multiple LED type. Lamp test circuits with separate
push buttons shall be foreseen.
Labelling and Marking
The labeling and marking of all electrical equipment, panels, cabinets, junction boxes, etc.
shall be carried out in conformity with the respective drawings and documents.
In general all inscription plates and labels must be clearly visible and durable against the
ambient conditions. Fixing of plates and labels by screws or rivets only, adhesive labels may
be allowed only for small relays, contactors, etc. within cabinets and panels. Paper labels will
be not allowed for any kind of equipment.
The following kind of labels shall be used:
a) Name and rating for main equipment (motors, transformers, etc.) All labels and
markers shall be of stainless steel plates with engraved black letter and with
inscription in English and in Arabic.
b) Name and rating for process and auxiliary equipment These labels shall be of
stainless steel plates with engraved black letter and with inscription in English
for rating plates and English and Arabic for name plates.
c) Inscriptions for indoor cubicles, cabinets, boards and panels These labels shall
be of white hard plastic plates with engraved black letter and with inscription in
English.
d) Inscriptions for outdoor cabinets, boards and panels These labels shall be of
stainless steel plates with engraved black letter and with inscription in English.
The minimum size of the inscription shall be 5 mm.
In addition, each equipment as motors, pumps, motor/hydraulic actuators, cubicles, boards,

panels, cabinets, etc. must be equipped to the manufacturers name and rating plate with the
respective tag -and/or plant identification number. This number must be fixed on the
equipment by appropriate sized stainless steel plates. In case of indoor cubicles, cabinets,
boards and panels, hard plastic or aluminum plates can be used. The tag -and identification
numbers will be inscribed in English, only. The minimum size of plates and the size of the
inscription shall be approved by Client.
Furthermore, all Arabic translations are also part of Clients approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
Painting of all equipment and devices which forms part of the electrical power supply systems,
such as boards, panels, cabinets, motors, etc. shall be in compliance with the approved

15 Mar, 2011
manufacturer standard.
The Contractor must submit his painting specification including color code schedule of top
layer color for all electrical equipment, as a subject of approval by Client.
As a general rule all electrical cabinets, boards and cubicles must be painted outside as well
as also inside.
The entire painting shall be sufficiently resistant to stand transport, assembly and
maintenance operations without abnormal deterioration. Preferable flame retardant paint
coatings shall be used.
In all cases where site erection work exposes bare metal, such as a drilling or punching out of
holes, e.g. for cable gland entry, these areas shall be protected by the immediate application
of a protective coat similar to the original.
Any machines or bright faces and parts which are not painted (e.g. shaft of motors and valves
etc.) must be protected against corrosion by suitable agents prior to installation.
Marking, name, rating and tag -number plates shall not be painted and have to be covered
during painting or fixed on the equipment after painting.
3.02 Installation Requirements
General
The below listed requirements shall be treated as a general instruction for layout of electrical
rooms, site preparatory works and installation of power supply systems and equipment.
For more information reference is made to the detail specifications.
Electrical Equipment Rooms
In electrical equipment rooms (HV switchgear rooms, MV switchgear rooms, LV switchgear

rooms, etc.) no water lines or drain lines shall be routed. One exception is rooms, equipped
with water cooled converters, where the water feeder lines shall be installed on the shortest
possible way. Independent of this, all electrical equipment must be protected against drip
water from the top.
Escape ways must be provided for all electrical equipment rooms and rooms containing
machinery or other electro-mechanical equipment. HV, MV and LV rooms must be provided
with at least two escape way doors.
Escape way doors must allow opening from inside without using any key. Escape way signs
shall be provided inside the rooms above each escape way door and at other distinct
locations.

15 Mar, 2011
Installation of Equipment
HV-, MV-, LV switchgears and other cabinets, panels and boards must be installed to
guarantee sufficient space for cable connection, operation, maintenance and future
installation of further devices.
All installation works must be performed in a workmanlike-manner. Installation of structures,

equipment, panels, boards, etc. have to be performed in upright, horizontal position and
parallel to walls, in accordance with the approved layout and erection drawings.
Before installation of equipment the buildings and rooms must be ready for installation that
means:
walls and ceiling cleaned, painting completed,

doors and windows installed and tight,
foundation frames, supports, structures installed,
screed finished,
lighting installed or temporary illumination provided.
The final false floor plates (if any) shall be installed after switchgear and switchboard erection
to avoid damages.
For additional requirements and special room conditions for erection, the manufacturer
instructions of the different equipment and materials must be strictly observed.
All cubicles, cabinets and switchboards shall be erected on base frames, which are either
embedded in the concrete floor/screed or incorporated in the double floor construction. If not
specified otherwise the horizontal tolerance of the frames shall not exceed 1.5 mm over a
length of 5 m.
The alignment of the frames must be checked during installation of frames and prior to
commencement of cubicle and cabinet installation. Fixing of cubicles, cabinets and boards at
the base frames must be provided as per the detailed instructions of the manufacturer.
In each HV-, MV-and LV-room at each station the single line diagram of the respective
switchgear and switchboard arrangement shall be fixed on the wall in the respective room.
These single line diagrams will be printed on durable and light stable foils and shall reflect the
as-built status after plant commissioning.
The necessary number and type of special tools and keys, required for operation and routine
inspection, including all warning plates and signs shall be stored in each equipment room on
suitable racks.
Construction and Installation Personnel
The installation of the power supply equipment shall be performed by skilled and experienced
personnel, only. For each site one well-experienced and responsible construction supervisor
will be nominated, working in closed co-ordination with the overall construction manager.

15 Mar, 2011
For high and medium voltage installations (e.g. cubicle erection, cable termination, cable
testing, etc.) only experienced specialists are allowed for execution of such works.
Workshop, Tools, Installation Equipment
For installation works the Contractor will provide at each individual site electrical workshops
with suitable space, workbenches, machines and all required tools for erection of the power
supply equipment.
The electrical workshops shall be separated from the mechanical workshops and will be
maintained for the whole construction period. For line valve stations or other remote and
small sites, mobile car mounted workshops may be used.
3.03 Battery Limits
If in the detailed Specifications not otherwise specified, the battery limits for the power supply
equipment shall be general the terminal strip of the various boards, cabinets, panels or
equipment terminal boxes.
The field cabling and grounding for all electrical, control, instrumentation and
telecommunication equipment within the stations is part of the power supply system.
3.04 Shipping
The equipment should be suitably packaged before shipping. The packaging should be
carried out in a manner such that the devices and equipment are protected against damages
and influences of water and dust.
3.05 Storage Upon Arrival
Upon arrival at site all the equipment and materials shall be promptly stored until their
installation. Cases and wrapping-in may only be opened for checking purpose, but shall be
closed completely afterwards and brought in the original condition.
Boards, panels, cabinets and other sensitive equipment must be stored in closed and dry
rooms. Storage specifications of equipment manufacturer must be observed. In general all
equipments shall in no case be removed from their original packing during storage.
Equipment for outdoor application as power transformers, etc. can be stored in suitable and
fenced outdoor areas. Cables can also be stored outside, cable drums must be generally
protected by suitable cover plates (wood plates or equivalent).
The boxes and packing cases shall be clearly marked with the equipment label in conformity
with the plant identification and the transport, shipping and packing procedure.

15 Mar, 2011
3.06 Acceptance and Testing
General
Electrical equipment shall be subject to acceptance tests to demonstrate that it meets the
requirements of the detailed design and the Contract and as required by the applicable codes
and standards. The test procedures are subject for approval by Client / Engineer. Tests shall
be carried out as factory acceptance tests and as on-site tests on complete installations.
The acceptance tests and criteria will be described in the respective detail specifications.
TEST CERTIFICATE
The Contractor shall submit the certificates in accordance with EN 10204 and as stipulated in
the Contract.
3.07 Maintanance
The Contractor shall recommend accessories and special tools required for operation and
maintenance of the electrical systems. The supplier shall state, how the equipment will be
supported on site during operation.
3.08 Spare Parts
The Contractor shall recommend spare parts required for commissioning and operation of the
electrical systems. SPIR forms (Spare Parts List & Interchangeability Record) shall be
submitted for two (2) and five (5) years operation.
The Contractor shall complete and submit a list of recommended spare parts with prices and
delivery time, divided in the above mentioned periods.
The spare part lists shall include beside the relevant specification also the supplier code and
the order code for all materials, parts and components.
3.09 Documentation
The following documentation shall be provided describing component design, material

specifications and inspection test results.
This shall include, for example, the following:
drawings with all relevant design and construction,

calculations,
details,
material specifications,
manufacturing process records,
quality plan and inspections and test plans,
test procedures,

15 Mar, 2011
commissioning instructions,
Operation instructions,
Maintenance instructions.
Prior to shipment, the following documents shall be submitted to the Employer:
test protocols according to factory acceptance tests,

test certificates,
Packing and shipping specification.
All documents and test certificates shall be in English. Type test certificates will be acceptable
only if supplied for standard equipment of the same type and rating.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHOD



DISCIPLINE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Page 1 of 4
ELECTRICAL BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHOD
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Descriptions of Work
1.02 Quality Assurance
1.03 Submittals
1.04 Delivery, Storage and Handling
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Soil Material
2.02 Fire Resistant Fire Sealents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Fire Stoping Sealants
Rev. 00
CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715 Page 2 of 4
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes general construction materials and methods for application with
electrical installations as follows:
1. Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground

raceways and cables, vaults, and equipment.
2. Fire-rated sealants for sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors
and fire-rated walls.
3. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical
materials and equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards including, but
not limited to, those listed below:
UL Underwriters Laboratories
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
TRANSMISSION MATERIAL STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATION (TMSS)
TRANSMISSION ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION (TES)
TES-P-104 Underground cable engineering standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data for each type or access doors, panels and joint sealers.
2. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for

selective demolition prior to commencement of WORK. Include coordination
for shut-off of electrical service, and details for dust and noise control.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. JOINT SEALANTS
1. Deliver joint sealant materials in original unopened containers or bundles with

labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color,
expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-
component materials.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers'
recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS: All fill materials shall be subject to the approval of the Company
Representative.
A. On-Site Fill Material: All approved usable material removed from excavation shall be
used, as far as practicable, for backfill. Soil rock mixture which is free from organic
matter containing no vegetation, masses of roots, rocks or lumps over 150mm (6)in
diameter and having not more than 15% of the rocks and lumps larger than 60mm (2-
1/2 more or less), shall be considered as suitable material for fill.
B. Borrow Fill: If on-site fill material is unsuitable for backfill as determined by Company
Representative, CONTRACTOR shall use materials from approved borrow fill.
C. Sand envelope for underground cable and conduit installation shall be dry sand free
from stones, rubble, debris, waste and other deleterious matter.
2.02 FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through-penetration fire-

stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and
floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established
by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., or other approval equal.
Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessories materials, to fill openings
around electrical services penetrating floors or wall assembly in which penetration occurs.
Comply with installation requirements established by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-STOPPING SEALANTS
Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings
around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance
ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with
installation requirements established by manufacturer..
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS




Page 1 of 12
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes
1.02 Coordination
1.03 Related Sections
1.04 References
1.06 Submittals
1.07 Delivery Storage and Handling
1.08 Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Conduits
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Conduits

3.02 Installation of Joints, Fittings and Bends
3.03 Installation of Conduits Stubouts
3.04 Installation of Conduits Stubups
3.05 Installation of Empty Conduits
3.06 Installation of Underground Conduits
3.07 Installation of Conduit Supports
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Install only new conduits in standard lengths, UL labeled. Unless otherwise indicated, all
wiring and cables shall be installed in conduits or cable trays or other raceways as indicated.
All dimensions will refer to inside diameter of conduits and conduit fill shall be as per Table 1
Chapter 9 of NEC.
1.02 COORDINATION
Determine the work to be performed by the building contractors and other trades throughout.
Provide the type and amount of raceways as equipment necessary to place this work in
proper operation, completely installed, and ready for use.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
Furnish and install related work and materials in strict accordance with the following sections
of this specification:
A. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
C. Section 16135 Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings
D. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
E. Section 16452 Grounding and Bonding
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the provisions and

recommendations of the following standards.
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
6. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
8. All Government Laws, Ordinances & Regulations
Provide manufacturer's certificate or furnish such evidences as necessary to PMT

Representative to assure that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Before starting installation of any materials or equipment, submit for approval a

complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work. This list shall
include catalog numbers, cuts, data sheets, and such other descriptive information as
may be required.
No consideration will be given to partial list submitted from time to time. Approval of
materials will be based on manufacturer's published data, installation and roughing-in
data sheets and drawings indicating compliance with the Contract documents.
B. Submittals shall be submitted within three (3) weeks after the contract start date.
C. All metric substitutes for Schedule 40 and 80 conduit and fittings shall be submitted for
approval three (3) weeks after the contract start date.
1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect all materials and equipment from damage or corrosion during handling and storage.
Refer to specification section 16010 - "Basic Electrical Requirements" for complete work
scope. Provide appropriate covering for all stored materials.
1.08 TESTING
Before shipment, materials shall be inspected to insure proper operation and conformance
with manufacturer's published specifications. Notification of completion of testing shall be
sent to Client Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUITS
A. CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
1. Minimum Size: 20 mm (3/4 inch) unless otherwise specified.
2. Underground Installations:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
a. Direct buried conduit shall be rigid steel, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM
A123 and PVC coated per NEMA RN 1 (minimum thickness of PVC: 40
mils), or Type DB PVC conduit per NEMA TC 8. Rigid steel conduit
without a PVC coating is acceptable if hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123 and encased in at least 75 mm (3 inch) of concrete.
PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade. Where above grade
extensions of buried PVC conduits are required, a transition shall be
made using threaded PVC to rigid metal conduit adapters.
b. Minimum Size: 25 mm (1 inch).
3. Above Grade Installations:
a. Outdoor Locations: Conduit above ground in outdoor location shall be

threaded, rigid steel per ANSI C 80.1, except it shall be hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. Conduit fittings and
supports shall be cast or forged steel, cast iron or malleable iron, either
hot-dip galvanized (preferably), or zinc electroplated as supplied by the
manufacturer. No aluminum fittings shall be used. Only malleable iron
sealing fittings shall be used. Gray cast iron split type (EYSR) retrofit
sealing fittings may be used if required for repair purposes.
b. Wet and Damp Locations: use PVC coated rigid steel conduit.
4. Indoor Locations: Use hot dip galvanized rigid steel conduit for all exposed and
subject to mechanical damage; electric metallic tubing (EMT) conduit system
above suspended ceiling, in partitions and furred areas.
5. All installations shall comply with NEC, Electrical general notes and details
shown on the Contract Drawings.
6. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used as
shown on Contract Drawings and as permitted per NEC.
7. All conduits shall be seamless. Conduits with seams shall not be used on this
Project.
B. GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Manufacturers: Refer to Approved Manufacturers list.
2. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and ASTM A123.
3 Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; conduit fittings and supports

shall be cast or forged steel, cast-iron or malleable iron, either hot-dipped
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
galvanized (preferably) or zinc electroplated. No aluminum fittings shall be

used.
C. PVC COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Manufacturers: Refer to Approved Manufacturers list.
2. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 0.1
mm (40 mil) thick.
3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external

PVC coating, 0.1 mm (40 mil) thick, to match conduit.
4. All PVC-coated conduit and fittings shall be furnished from one manufacturer
for uniform appearance and interchangeability of parts.
5. Only Strap Wrenches are allowed for installing PVC coated rigid steel conduit.
D. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. Manufacturers : Refer to Approved Manufacturers list.
2. Description : Interlocked steel construction.
3. Fittings : ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
E. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. Manufacturers : Refer to Approved Manufacturers list.
2. Description : Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
3. Fittings : ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
F. PVC CONDUIT
1. Manufacturers: Refer to Approved Manufacturers list
2. Description: NEMA TC 8; Suitable for direct burial (type DB) and 90 degree C
(194 degree F) cable operation.
3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:NEMA - TC 9.
G. CONDUIT SEALING COMPOUND
1 Manufacturers : 3 M Type CP 25 N/S or CP 25 L Kit

3M Scotchcast Brand 4416 Kit
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
Crouse-Hinds Type Chico (for explosion proof seals).

Dow Corning Silicon Foam RTV 3-654B or other
Approved Manufacturer.
H. CABLE SEALING
The correct sealing compound shall be used with the specified seals.
1. Manufacturers : Raychem Type T (CBK-T) Gas Blocking Kit or other

Approved Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS
A. Install conduit in accordance with NEC, Contract Drawings, NECA Standard of

Installation and the manufacturers instructions.
B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C. Support conduit using epoxy coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable
hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Group related conduits; support using
conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25
percent additional conduits. Fasten conduit supports to building structure or surfaces.
Damaged PVC coat on conduit or exposed threads shall be coated with PVC patching
compound, APCS -22, or APCS - 26 B.
D. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
E. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
F. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Where conduit penetrates
wall, fire stopping measures shall be completed per Contract Drawings.
G. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
Install conduit sealing accordingly to Contract Drawings.
H. Route conduit under slab from point-to-point.
I. Do not cross conduits in slab.
J. Maintain 300 mm (12 inch) clearance between conduit and surfaces with
temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
K. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter, de-burr cut ends. Threads must be
tapered in accordance with ANSI/ASMI B.1.20.1 and remaining threads exposed after
make-up shall be coated with rust preventing grease such as Course Hinds thread
lubricant.
L. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
M. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Coupling

and connectors will be in accordance with NEC-346-9(A). Wipe nonmetallic conduit
dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
N. Use conduit hubs with ground lugs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or
wet locations, and to cast boxes.
O. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between boxes. Size pull
boxes per NEC-370-6. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as
around beams. Use factory elbows or hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit. The minimum bending radius shall be in
accordance with NEC-346-10. Factory elbows are preferred. Heating of conduits for
bending is not permitted. Oversized bending form to be used when bending PVC
Coated conduits. Only strap type wrenched to be used when installation PVC coated
conduits.
P. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with stainless steel drain fitting at low points
in conduit system. Install breathers at high points on conduit system.
Q. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses expansion joints.
R. Expansion fittings shall be installed in each straight conduit run exceeding 45 meters
(150 feet). When expansion fittings are installed oversized conduits supports shall be
used to allow the conduits to move.
S. Provide suitable pull wire or nylon rope of adequate strength in each conduit except
sleeves and nipples.
T. All conduit systems shall be swabbed clean before installation of wires or cables. PVC
conduits must be checked for clearance using mandrel. Mandrel shall be pulled in
both directions. Failure to freely pass the mandrel in either direction shall constitute
the failure of the specific conduit section. The failed section shall be replaced.
U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
V. Ground and bond metallic conduit.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
W. Identify conduit.
X The Contractor shall notify a minimum of 24 hours prior to backfilling of trenches to

enable the inspection of underground conduits.
Y. All cable entries to buildings shall be sealed (using Raychem Gas Blocking Kit Type T
or approved equal. Multi-conductor cable shall be stripped and sealing shall be
placed between the outside covering and the cables.
Z. Conduit entering into a manhole or existing spare conduit (duct) used by this projects
shall be sealed, inside the manhole, with 3 M Scotch cast Brand 4416 Kit or approved
equal sealing compound. Cable installed in manholes shall be adequately supported.
AA. Direct buried cables and conduit shall be installed in a single layer only except where
rearrangement is necessary at transitions to multi-layer concrete encased duct banks
or for entering buildings.
AB. Installation of direct buried cables and conduit shall comply with NEC.
AC. Location of underground cables and conduits shall be marked.
AD. PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade. Where above grade extensions of
buried PVC conduits are required, a transition shall be made using threaded PVC to
rigid galvanized steel conduit adapters.
AE Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
AF. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof
jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS, FITTINGS AND BENDS
A. Where conduit is underground, below slabs on grade, exposed to weather, or in wet

locations, make joints tight.
B. Cut threads on rigid conduit to standard taper and to length such that bare metal
exposed by the threading operation will be completely covered by the couplings or
fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that joints will become
secure and wrench-tight before conduit ends butt together in couplings and before
conduit ends butt into fittings. Securely tighten threaded connections.
C. Threaded Conduit: Use red lead and oil (or litharge and glycerine) applied to the
male threads only and tighten joints securely. For underground conduit, apply a
heavy coat of corrosion-preventative paint to surfaces within 6 inches (150 mm) on
both sides of fittings and to areas where wrenches or other tools have been applied.
On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanized repair stick,
" Enterprise Galvanizing" "Galvabar", 3M, or approved equal high-zinc coating.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
D. Plastic Conduit (PVC) : Use approved fittings, accessories and solvent-weld cement
specifically manufactured for the purpose. Not to be used for power distribution inside
buildings.
E. Bushings, of the insulating type and where required by NEC, shall be installed on
ends of all conduits. Locknuts, of the bonding type and where required by NEC shall
be installed on threaded conduits, penetrating outlets, boxes, cabinets, equipment,
etc., except cast conduit bodies equipped with threaded hubs.
F. Threaded conduit connections to outdoor, weatherproof, boxes, cabinets, etc., shall

be made using watertight, insulated throat, conduit hubs, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Electric metallic tubing (EMT) connections to outlets, boxes, cabinets, etc., shall be
made using watertight, malleable iron, compression ring type conduit connectors,
complete with locknut and insulated bushing. Set-screw conduit connectors and
couplings will not be permitted.
H. Flexible metallic conduit and liquid tight conduit connections shall be made using
insulated die cast connectors with ridges that thread into the inside of the conduit.
Binding-screw type connectors will not be permitted.
I. Provide a green insulated grounding conductor of minimum size as required by code

but smaller or the same size with the conductors supplying the power in all flexible
and non-conductive conduits or ducts and other raceways having a length of flexible
conduit or non-conductive raceway as part of the run.
J. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the serving
utilities, make large radius bends to meet their requirements. Replace deformed,
flattened, or kinked conduit. Not more than the equivalent of four quarter-bends shall
be used in any run between terminals and cabinets, or between outlet and junction or
pull boxes.
K. Rigid steel conduit bends, 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) trade size or larger shall be of the long
radius type, factory-made bends, or field bend with a power bender designed for the
purpose, utilizing bending shoes sized for the conduit used. All bends shall be free of
dents or flattening.
L. Plastic conduit (PVC) bends shall be factory-made bends, or field bend using
approved heat box bender and conduit mandrels to assure full inside diameter and
prevent deforming or discolor conduit.
M. All bends shall have a radius not less than that required by the NEC-346-10.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT STUBOUTS
A. Where shown on drawings extend underground conduit for future use, a minimum of 3
feet (1 m) beyond building foundations.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
B. Cap ends of conduits and wrap entire exposed portions with tape, "Scotch wrap",
"Johns-Manville", or approved equal. Plug ends of non-metallic conduit with factory-
made caps or Dexseal covered with gravel and redwood planks for mechanical
protections. All communications conduits will require a pull string
C. Exact locations of stubouts shall be indicated on the Project Record Documents.

Provide electrical conduit stub markers.
D. All utility conduit runs outside of building, including stubouts on the site, shall be
marked on the Project Record Documents, identified and dimensioned exactly from
and referenced building signed by the Contractor and Countersigned by the PMT
Inspector.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS STUBUPS
A. Use rigid steel conduit and elbows for stubups and risers to grade form non-metallic
conduits, unless otherwise shown. Approved adapter fittings from steel to non-
metallic conduits shall be used.
B. Terminate stubups for connections to movable equipment or below movable partitions
with flush floor couplings. Use oil or grease on top of coupling and in threads of plugs
to prevent sticking. In exterior locations, terminate with plugged couplings set flush
with building exterior.
C. In electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, and other unfinished areas terminate stubups
to a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMPTY CONDUITS
A. Provide a nylon "pull wire", polyethylene rope rated at 250 pounds (113 kg) tensile
strength, or steel fish-wire in all empty conduits in which permanent wiring is not
installed. Not less than 12 inches (30 cm) of slack shall be left at ends of pull wires.
B. Tag empty conduit at each accessible end, identifying the purpose of the conduit and
the location of the other end.
C. In wet, corrosive, outdoor or underground locations, use brass, bronze, or copper No.
16 gage tags or lead tags secured to conduit ends with No. 16 or larger galvanized
wire. Clearly inscribe complete identifying information on the tags with steel punch
dies.
D. In dry interior locations, use meta-rimmed paper tags securely affixed with nylon
twine. Inscribe on the tags with India ink, clear and complete identifying information
E. Plug of cap all unused conduit openings with approved fittings designed for the
purpose. Caulking and sealing compound shall not be used for plugging empty
conduits.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUITS
A. Encase all underground conduit in concrete envelopes with a minimum of 3 inches (75
mm) cover all around unless otherwise shown. Use red coloring dye in concrete.
B. Concrete envelops may be omitted for rigid plastic conduit Schedule 40, below slabs
on grade except services above 600 volts.
C. Use appropriate manufactured concrete or plastic spacers to ensure minimum

required spacing and concrete coverage.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. All conduit shall be installed as a complete system and shall be securely fastened in
place. Conduit shall be firmly supported within 3 feet (910 mm) of each outlet box,
junction box, cabinet, or fitting. Conduit shall be supported at least every 10 feet (3
meter) and in accordance with Table 346-12 of the NEC. Provide additional supports
where required or as indicated.
B. In steel stud construction, rigidly tie conduit at maximum 4 feet (1.2 m) intervals with
No.16 gage double annealed galvanized wire to prevent conduit movement from
vibration or other causes.
C. Above suspended ceilings, support conduit on or from the structural members of the
building. Use approved beam clamps securely fastened in place, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Suspended conduit shall be installed on rack hangers made of angle iron, channel or
channel framing, threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried.
Minimum 3/8 inch diameter (10 mm) where rods are more than 2 feet (0.6 meter) long
provide rigid sway bracing. Conduits shall be securely fastened to hangers using one-
hole malleable straps or malleable iron, factory made split-hinged pipe clamps.
E. Use one-hole malleable iron straps with metallic expansion anchors and screws or
preset inserts for conduit run exposed on concrete. Use preset inserts in concrete
when possible.
F. Whenever conduit may be affected by movements of the supporting structures or

medium, and where secured on both sides of building control joints, provide suitable
flexible or expansion joints.
G. Drilling or welding of conduit to structures or medium will not be permitted, unless prior
approval is received. Conduit or pipe straps shall not be welded to structures.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS




Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ManufacturerS
2.02 Materials
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Cable Tray Systems

3.02 Grounding
3.03 Warning Signs
3.04 Feild Testing
3.05 Cleaning and Finish Repair
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes aluminum Cable Trays.
1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association

(ANSI/NFPA)
ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
2. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM)
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA Standard VE 1 Metallic Cable Tray Systems
4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
B. Cable trays and components shall be listed and labeled by UL and comply with the
NEMA Standards.
C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with the
National Electrical Code.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: All cable tray components shall be the product of a

single manufacturer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data for cable tray products.
2. Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of factory test reports performed in

conformance with NEMA Standard VE 1 on cable trays of types and size
specified for this project.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products, which shall be incorporated with WORK include, but not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the

following:
B-Line Systems, Inc.

Chalfant Mfg. Co.
The George-Ingraham Corp.
GS Metals Corp.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
MP Husky Corp.
P-W Industries, Inc.
Square D Co.
T.J. Cope, Inc.
Chatsworth Products, Inc.
Other Approved Manufacturers
2.02 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Cable tray systems shall be of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA classes and shall
be complete with manufacturer's recommended covers, barrier strips, dropouts,
fittings, conduit adaptors, hold- down devices, grommets, and blind ends as
required and indicated.
2. Cable tray products shall have rounded edges and smooth surfaces.
B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1. Aluminum Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Cable tray shall be copper-
free aluminum (maximum of 0.4 percent copper). Construction and
mechanical loading shall be in accordance with NEMA VE 1.
a. Aluminum cable tray shall be the perforated type.
b. Aluminum cable tray installations in outdoor locations shall utilize

ventilated, louvered, cable tray covers, secured with stainless steel
banding, one band per 1 meter of cover length, with a minimum of
three bands per cover.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Exceptions:
1. If the cable trays contain only instrument and communication cables, covers
may be solid (unventilated).
2. Cable tray covers may be deleted at the discretion of the facility Proponent.
However, cable trays should be located to minimize the potential for
mechanical damage and minimize the effects of sunlight on the cables. Cable
derating is also required for cables exposed to sun.
C. SUPPORTS AND CONNECTORS
Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers shall be as

recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
D. FASTENERS FOR SUPPORTS
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, fasteners to connect cable tray supports
to the building structure shall be as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for

the intended service.
E. FIRE STOPPING
General: Materials shall be UL listed and labeled and FM approved for fire ratings
consistent with penetrated barriers. Materials may include but not limited to the
following:
1. Sleeves: Schedule 40, welded, black steel pipe sleeves. Sizes as indicated or
minimum NEC size for cable or cable group to be installed.
2. Sealing Fittings: Suitable for sealing cables in sleeves or core-drilled holes.
3. Sealing Mortar: Suitable for sealing cable penetration slots/openings in fire

barriers.
4. Sealant: One-part compound for sealing cables, sleeves, and openings in fire
barriers.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant as specified in paragraph "Fire-

Resistant Joint Sealers" in Division 16 Section 16050, "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
F. WARNING SIGNS
1. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch high, black on yellow background with legend (both in

English and Arabic):
"WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT

FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."
1. Materials and Fastening: Conform to Section "Electrical Identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
A. Install cable trays in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions.

Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Cable tray systems shall not have
mechanically discontinuous segments of cable tray runs.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays.
C. Support cable tray independently from the building structural components.
D. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

Exception: Plant structural members used as supports for conduit and other electrical
equipment are not included in this section. Attachment hardware (clamps, bolts, nuts,
etc.) must however comply to the requirements.
1. Channel erector system components (Unistrut or similar) used to support

conduits, cable trays, enclosures, lighting fixtures and other electrical
equipment shall be made of steel and iron, either hot-dip galvanized
(preferably), or zinc electroplated as supplied by the manufacturer.
E. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to carry
present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four or 200 lbs, whichever
is greater.
F. Support Locations: Locate supports in accordance with the recommendations of

NEMA Standard VE 1.
Exception: When the following NEMA recommendations are difficult because of the
location of the plant structures and equipment, structurally equivalent of supports is
permitted with the approval of Client Consulting Services Dept.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
G. Installation of supports shall be in accordance with cable tray manufacturer's written

instructions and the recommendations of Paragraph 6.5 of NEMA Standard VE 1.
H. Fastening Supports:. Unless otherwise indicated, fasten cable tray supports securely
to the building structure.
I. Support at Connections to Equipment:
1. Where cable trays connect to equipment, provide flanged fittings fastened to

the tray and to the equipment. Support the tray separately. Do not carry the
weight of the tray on the equipment enclosure.
2. Cables may be extended from the cable trays to equipment if:
a. They are armored or metal clad and are properly supported, or
b. They are installed in rigid or flexible conduit
J. Thermal Contraction and Expansion: Install expansion connectors in cable tray runs
that exceed the following length:
1. Aluminum Tray: 90 feet.
2. Spacing for expansion connectors shall not exceed maximums indicated in

Table 6-1 of NEMA Standard VE 1.
3. Gap Settings for expansion connectors shall be in accordance with Figure 6-9
of NEMA Standard VE 1.
4. The maximum spacing between expansion joints shall be based on a

temperature differential of 38 deg C calculated according to NEMA VE 1.
K. Direction Changes: Make changes in direction of cable tray with standard cable tray
fittings.
L. Locate cable tray above piping except as required for tray accessibility and as
otherwise indicated.
M. Firestopping: Where cable trays penetrate fire and smoke barriers including walls,
partitions, floors, and ceilings, install firestopping at penetrations after cables are
installed.
N. Sleeves For Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through
firestopped cable tray penetrations of fire/smoke barriers.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
O. Working Space: Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit access for installing
cables.
P. Barriers: Where trays carry conductors of different systems, such as power,

communications, and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600 V, 5,000
V, and 15,000 V, install barriers to separate the systems.
3.02 GROUNDING
Electrically ground cable trays and ensure continuous electrical conductivity of cable tray system.
Use tray as equipment ground conductor for itself only, not for connected equipment.
3.03 WARNING SIGNS
After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs, on or in proximity to cable
trays, where easily seen by occupants of space.
3.04 FIELD TESTING
A. Grounding: Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding
connections.
B. Anchorage: For critical requirements only and as directed by the Company

Representative, test pull-out resistance of one of each type, size, and anchorage
material for toggle bolts and powder-driven threaded studs.
Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales required for
reliable testing. Obtain the Architect's approval before transmitting loads to the structure.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof-load for fastener. If fastening fails test, replace fastener and
retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
3.05 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A. Upon completion of installation of cable trays, inspect trays, fittings, and accessories.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. PVC or Paint Finish: Repair damage with matching touch-up coating recommended
by the tray manufacturer.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16118
DUCT BANK




Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL DUCT BANK
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Reference
1.04 Submittals
1.05 Product Record Documents
1.06 Qualification
1.07 Regulatory Requirements
1.09 Project Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC Conduits
2.02 Accessories
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
3.02 Duct Bank Installation
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 GENERAL
A. PVC Conduit duct bank.
A. Section 02221 Excavating,Trenching, Bacfilling and Compacting
B. Section 03100 Concrete Formwork.
C. Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.
D. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
E. Section 16124 Medium Voltage Cable
F. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
G. Section 16452 Grounding and Bonding
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
C. NEMA RN 1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) externally coated galvanized rigid steel

conduit and intermediate metal conduit.
D. NEMA TC 8 Extra-Strength PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground

Installation.
E. NEMA TC 9 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and
Tubing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of conduit.
B. Product Data: Provide for PVC conduit
C. Manufacturers Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,

examination, preparation, and installation.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
A. Accurately record actual locations of exact routing of ductbank on Drawings to show

As- Built installation.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Refer to Approved Manufacturers List.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/IEEE C2.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm
acceptable to Client, as suitable for purpose specified and shown on Contract
Drawings.
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 16010.
B. Inspect conduit for damage prior to accepting on site.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade.
Provide appropriate covering and end caps.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. To prevent conduit distortion, do not overstack.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Contract Drawings and modify to
show As-Built conditions.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation.
C. Duct bank routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations. Route the duct
banks as required to complete the system, and to avoid underground interferences.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: Refer to Approved Manufacturers List.
B. Description: NEMA TC 8; Seamless conduits, suitable for duct bank (type DB) and
for 90C (194F) cables.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 9.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.02 ACCESSORIES
The location of underground ductbanks, conduit or cable shall be marked.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavation under provisions of Section 02221.
B. Verify that excavation and subgrade preparation is completed and ready for ductbank
installation.
3.02 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION
A. Install top of duct banks at depths as indicated on Drawings. The minimum depth
shall be as specified in SAUDI ELECTRICITY Engineering Standard TES-P-104.
B. Install duct with minimum slope of 100 mm per 30 m (4 inches per 100 feet). Slope
duct away from building entrances.
C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter, de-burr cut ends.
D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings, fasten securely.
E. Join PVC duct using adhesive as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
F. Wipe PVC duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to entire
area on the inside of coupling fitting and on the outside of conduit ends. Allow joint to
cure for 20 minutes, minimum. Remove excess adhesive build-up using a cleaning
solvent as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
G. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 bends between pull points.
H. Duct bank shall consist of PVC conduit encased in reinforced concrete as shown on
the Contract Drawings.
The concrete shall extend at least 75 mm (3 inch) in all directions from the outside
surface of conduits or reinforced steel. The top layer of the concrete shall be mixed
with red dye. Terminate duct using end bell or protective bushings at both ends.
I. Use manufacturer designed separators and chairs installed not greater than 2.4 M (8
feet) on centers. Makeshift conduit supports are not acceptable.
J. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.
K. Pour concrete under provisions of Section 03300.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
L. Provide steel reinforcing rebars where specified on Contract Drawings and in

accordance with Section 03200.
M. Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels.
N. Snake and Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of
dirt and moisture. Mandrel shall be pulled in both directions. Failure to freely pass the
mandrel in either direction shall constitute the failure of the specific conduit section.
The failed section shall be replaced.
O. A nylon pull line of sufficient strength shall be left in place after the duct is cleaned.
P. Backfill trenches under provisions of Section 02221.
Q. Interface installation of underground warning markers with backfilling specified in

Section 02221.
R. Provide conduit seals under the provisions of Section 16111.
S. Provide underground duct bank markers under the provision of Section 16195.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES




Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL WIRES AND CABLES
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Wires and Cables
2.03 Connections and Terminations
2.04 Wire Markers on Conductors
2.05 Color Coding for Phase Identifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Wires and Cables

3.02 Field Quality Control
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control
and related systems rated 600 volts and less.
B. Included in this Section is control wiring used for the interconnection of electrical
control devices, such as pushbuttons, electromechanical relays, etc. and also
microprocessor based protection, protection relays for power distribution and motors.
C. Wiring connected on one or both sides to electronic instruments, distributed control

systems, computers, etc. (except for AC power connections).
D. This Section does not cover internal wiring of manufactured equipment approved by
Client.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA)
ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM B8 Concentric-lay-stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-hard, or Soft
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
4. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
IEC 228 Conductors of Insulated Cables

IEC 332-1 Tests on Electric Cables Under Fire Conditions - Part 1:
Test on a single vertical insulated wire or cable
IEC 332-3 Tests on Electric Cables Under Fire Conditions - Part 3:

Tests on bunched wires and cables
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
5. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO)
SSA 55 PVC-Insulated Cables with Circular Copper Conductors
6. TES Transmission Engineering Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

offering products which shall be incorporated with WORK include, but not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the

following:
1. Wire and Cable:
American Insulated Wire Corp.

Brintec Corp.
Carol Cable Co. Inc.
Senator Wire and Cable Co.
Southwire Company
Saudi Cable Company
2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:
O-Z/Gedney Co.
Square D Company
Burndy Co.
Thomas and Betts
2.02 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Low voltage jacketed cables shall comply with NEC or IEC 502.
1. NEC low voltage cables shall be rated 600V, shall have a minimum temperature
rating of 90 deg C dry/75 deg C wet, and shall conform to UL
Standards according to the particular type (e.g. UL 1277, including its vertical
tray flame test, for type TC tray cables, etc.).
2. IEC 502 type cables shall be rated 600/1000V, shall have a minimum rating of
85 deg C, and shall meet the flame test of IEC 332-3.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
B. Low voltage unjacketed insulated wires, shall comply with NEC or SSA 55.
1. NEC low voltage wires shall be rated 600V, shall have a minimum temperature
rating of 90 deg C dry/75 deg C wet, and shall conform to UL Standards
according to the particular type (e.g. UL 83 for THHN/THWN and UL 44 for
XHHW).
Exception:
For wiring of equipment such as lighting fixtures, etc., that require higher
temperature wires and cables, the above minimum temperature ratings shall
be increased accordingly.
C. Conductors: Power and control conductors shall be stranded copper, except solid
copper conductors 6mm square (10 AWG) and smaller may be used. Cables with
solid conductors are also permitted.
D. Conductor Stranding: Stranding shall be ASTM B8 Class B or C or IEC 228 Class 2,

except flexible cords, portable cables and motor leads shall have finer stranding in
accordance with appropriate ICEA and UL Standards or manufacturers
recommendations.
E. Wiring Insulation for Interior Building Wiring: Unless otherwise indicated, provide
THHN/THWN insulation for all conductor sizes, except for equipment grounding
conductor which may have PVC or thermoplastic insulation (green).
F. Minimum Wire Size of Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, minimum size of

conductors shall be as follows:
Control (600V and below) 2.5mm square (14 AWG)

Power (600V and below) 4mm square (12 AWG)
G. Conductors of multi-conductor control cables shall be numbered or color-coded by

colors other than green, green with yellow stripes, white or gray.
H. Cables for area lighting shall be armored or metal clad. Armored cables shall meet the
requirements of TES-P-104.
2.03 CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity

ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use
connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon
which used.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
B. Copper compression (crimped) type connectors shall be used for splicing and
terminating stranded conductors, except as noted below:
1. Spring pressure type twist-on connectors, and pressure set screw connectors
with insulating caps are permitted for:
(a) For lighting and receptacle circuits in non-hazardous locations.

(b) In non-industrial applications.
2. Use of connectors or terminals other than compression type, except solder

connectors, supplied as integral parts or components of manufactured
equipment such as molded case circuit breakers, contactors, outlets, etc., is
permitted.
C. The use of solder lugs is prohibited. Compression connectors for 120mm square (4/0
AWG) and larger conductors shall be two hole NEMA design.
D. All compression connectors for 10mm square (8 AWG) and larger conductors shall
have a manufacturers reference die number and conductor size printed or stamped
on the connector.
Exception:
The use of dieless compression tools is acceptable, provided that the tool is suitable
for the connector, and, (for 8 AWG and larger conductor connectors), the tool ram
embosses the tool manufacturers logo on the crimp.
E. Insulated ring tongue, locking fork tongue, or flanged fork tongue compression
(crimped) terminals shall be used for control wiring.
Exception:
Only ring tongue compression (crimped) terminals shall be used for current
transformer circuits.
2.04 WIRE MARKERS ON CONDUCTORS
Other than color-coding requirements identified elsewhere in this Specifications, conductor

identification is required when conductor numbering systems are shown on the drawings.
Wires at termination points shall be identified by the use of permanently embossed wire
markers of the heat-shrinkable or slip-on type. Wrap-around, rigid snap-on, or adhesive type
markers are not permitted.
2.05 COLOR CODING FOR PHASE IDENTIFICATION
A. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors with
factory applied color as follows:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Phase 208y/120 Volts 480y/277 Volts
A Black Yellow
B Red Brown
C Blue Orange
Neutral White White
Ground Green Green
B. Except for ground conductor in which green is mandatory, use conductors with black
insulation or jacket and color-code with Scotch No. 35 color-coding tape or equivalent
for specified insulations and jackets not manufactured by the selected vendor with
integral colors. Color-code each conductor entering every box, cabinet, panelboard,
through, and wireway. In wireways and other locations where conductors are
accessible, color-code conductors every 1500mm (5 FT).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES
A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.
B Coordinate cable installation with other Work.
C Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.
D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips
which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to wire or cable.
E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.
F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours, where possible.
G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
H. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical
strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced.
I. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
J. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with
conductors larger than 6mm square (10 AWG) cabled in individual circuits. Make
terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and

terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
L. For direct buried cable installation, conform with the requirements of TES-P-104.
Direct buried cable splices shall be made with splicing kits approved for such use.
M. Direct buried cables that cross under paved roads, concrete slabs, railroads, or other
areas that would require extensive or impractical excavations to replace, shall be run
in duct banks or PVC sleeves.
Exception:
1. Ground grid conductors

2. Asphalt-paved parking lots
3. Plant areas paved with asphalt for soil stabilization.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cables shall be 1000V DC megger tested after installation and prior to placing in
service.
B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper
functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.
D. Correct the deficiencies found at no cost to Client.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16124
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE




Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
1.05 Warrenty
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Medium Voltage Cable
2.03 Splicing and Terminating Products
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
3.02 Installation of Cables
3.03 Installation of Splices
3.04 Grounding
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes conductor cables and splices, terminations, and accessories for
4.16 kV underground electrical distribution systems.
B. Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate
to this Section:
1. 16322 "Pad Mounted Power Transformer" for cable termination provisions.
Transmission Engineering Specification

TES-P-104 Underground Cable Engineering Standards
Transmission Material Standards and Specification (TMSS)
B. Installer Qualifications: Splices and terminations on cables rated 1000V shall be

made by personnel certified.
C. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent

testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted
criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to
conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.
D. Cable Testing After Installation: Conform with the requirements of TES-P-104.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data on cables and cable accessories including descriptions and

detailed specifications.
2. Shop Drawings of splices and terminations.
3. Installer Certificates signed by CONTRACTOR that installers of cable splices

and terminations meet the experience qualifications specified under Quality
Assurance.
4. Field Test Reports: Conform with the requirements of TES-P-104.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
A. Reels shall be made of steel, lagged with wood, and shall be marked with a durable
label securely attached to a flange of the reel and plainly stating Buyers Purchase
Order number, shipping length of cable on reel, number, type and size of conductors,
cable configuration, and voltage rating. Cable ends shall be sealed and capped.
B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a clean, dry location. And provide
chock to every cable reels while on the lay down yard at the job site.
C. Cable reels shall be covered, or turned on their sides, when not in use for long periods
to prevent UV damage.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, mutually executed by

manufacturer and the principal installer, agreeing to repair or replace medium voltage
cables, splices, and terminations that fail in materials or workmanship within the
special project warranty period specified below. This warranty shall be in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies Client may have against the
CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents.
B. Special Project Warranty Period: 2 years beginning on the date of Substantial

Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

offering products which shall be incorporated with WORK include, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Cable
Jeddah Cable
Riyadh Cable
Mitsubishi Cable Industries
The Okonite Co.

Alcatel
Saudi Cable Company
Or Other Approved Manufacturers
2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories
Electrical Products Division 3M.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Engineered Products Co.

G&W Electric Co.
M.P. Husky Corp.
Raychem Corp.
Or Other Approved Manufacturers
2.02 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
A. General: Cable shall be the types and sizes as indicated on the drawings..
B. If not indicated on the drawings, cable shall be either cross-linked-polyethylene

(XLPE) or ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulated, conforming to IEC 502 or AEIC
(CS5 or CS6). .Substitution of IEC cable with AEIC cable, if IEC cable is specified,
and vice versa, is prohibited.
C. Conductors: Conductors shall conform with one of the following:
1. IEC 502 Class 2 annealed copper, plain or metal coated
2. AEIC Class B annealed copper, plain or metal coated
D. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi conductive compound, or a layer of extruded semi-

conducting compound over a semi-conducting tape.
E. Insulation Screen (Non-metallic part): Layer of extruded semi-conducting compound.

Semi-conducting coatings (paints) are not allowed. The extruded compound shall be
removable (strippable).
F. Insulation Screen (Metallic part): Copper shielding tape, helically applied over the
silicon-shielded, insulated conductor .
G. Concentric Neutral Conductor: The concentric neutral conductor shall be provided and
it shall take the place of the copper shielding tape. It shall consist of copper wires with
the specified cross-section, and shall be plain or metal coated as specified insulation
level shall be 133%
H. Ground Conductors: If specified, ground conductors shall be provided in the

interstices of the cable and shall conform with one of the following:
1. IEC 502. Class 2 stranded copper ground conductor
2. AEIC Class B stranded copper ground conductor
I. All cables shall have a continuous overall outer PVC jacket, suitable for 90 C
maximum rated conductor temperature.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
J. Cables shall be suitable for direct burial and for installation in duct banks and cable
trays.
K. Circuit Identification: Each phase of multi-conductor cables shall be permanently

identified.
2.03 SPLICING AND TERMINATING PRODUCTS
A. General: Comply with the following standards:
1. IEEE 404: Standard for Power Cable Joints.
2. IEEE 592: Standard for exposed semi conducting shields on premoulded high
voltage cable joints and separable insulated connectors.
3. UL 486A: Wire connectors for use with copper conductors.
A. Types: Compatible with the cable materials.
C. Connectors: Compression type as recommended by cable or splicing kit

manufacturer for the application.
D. Splicing shall be made with standard splicing kits and shall be one of the following
types:
1. Heat shrink splice kit of uniform cross section polymeric construction with outer
heat shrink jacket.
E, Separable Insulated Connectors: Modular system, complying with IEEE Standard

386, "Separable Insulated Connectors for Power Distribution Systems above 600V."
System shall consist of disconnecting, single pole, cable terminators and matching
stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals. System components shall be designed for
the system voltage and for sealing against moisture and shall conform to the following:
1. Cable Terminations at Transformers: Elbow type terminators that mate with

bushing terminals in the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways, cable racks and other cable installation locations for cleanliness of
raceways, minimum bending radii of cables, and conditions affecting performance of
cable. Pull a mandrel through raceways to check for suitable conditions. Do not
proceed with cable installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. General: Install cable accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions and as indicated. Comply with the requirements of TES-P-104.
B. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one cable is indicated in same
raceway. Use UL-listed and manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant
where necessary. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to cable.
D. Separation distances between conductors, pipelines, low voltage cables, control and
communication cables shall in conformance with TES-P-104.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SPLICES
A. Splicing of conductors shall not be permitted. In case of accidental damage of the

cable during installation, additional splices are permitted with the concurrence of the
cable Proponent.
B. Installation of Terminations
1. Install terminations at ends of conductors and seal multi-conductor cable ends

with standard kits. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply
with classes of terminations indicated.
2. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's

published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply
with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated

connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable
insulated connector fittings, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
A. General: Comply with applicable standards of the International Electrical Testing

Association (INETA) including standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and system."
B. Preparation: Perform the following preparations in advance of independent tests:
1. Test cables insulation resistance.
2. Test circuits continuity.
3. Furnish a set of Contract documents and manufacturer's recommendations to

test organization.
4. Make power available at test locations.
5. Test cables should be promptly removed after testing is complete.
C. Schedule tests and notify the Company Representative at least ten (10) working days
in advance of schedule for test commencement.
D. Test procedure shall conform to the following:
1. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an

Independent electrical testing organization to perform tests on medium voltage
cable.
2. Test Objectives: To assure cable installation is operational within industry and

manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract
Documents, and is suitable for energizing.
3. Procedures: Comply with the INETA Standard and IEEE 400. Upon
satisfactory completion of tests, attach a label to tested components.
E. Tests shall include all cable testing requirements of TES-P-104.
F. Reports: The testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and
tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective
items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to the Company
Representative and CONTRACTOR.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16135
CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS




Page 1 of 7
ELECTRICAL CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation, Generals

3.02 Applications
3.03 Installation of Outlet Boxes
3.04 Installation of Pull and Junction Boxes
3.05 Installation of Cabinets and Hinged Door Enclousers
3.06 Grounding
3.07 Cleaning and Finsh Repair
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and
certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products
specified in this Section include:
Outlet and device boxes.

Pull and junction boxes.
Floor boxes and service fittings.
Cabinets.
Hinged door enclosures.
B Conduit-body-type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in Division 16

Section "Raceways."
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards including but
not limited to, those listed below
ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

IEC International Electro technical Commission
IEC 529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
UL Underwriters Laboratories
TES-P-104 Underground Cable Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1 Specification Sections:
1. Product data for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA
1.
2. Shop drawings for enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop fabricated,
(non-stock items). For shop fabricated junction and pull boxes, show
accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment.
Show box types, dimensions, and finishes.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:
1. Cabinets:
Electric Panelboard, Inc.

Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
Parker Electrical Mfg. Co.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
Square D Co.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit NEC, TES-P-100,
TES-P-104 requirements and installation conditions.
B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused
conduit hubs.
C. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller
than sizes indicated.
D. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
Comply with the provisions of the NEC, and in addition, comply with the following:
A. In outdoor plant areas, within the perimeter of process units, equipment and terminal
enclosures shall be either one of the following:
1. NEMA Type 3 or 4 or 4X
2. IEC 529 Type IP65 or better
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
B. Enclosures that are rated (a) NEMA Type 3, 4 or 4X, or (b) IEC 529 Type IP54, or
better, shall have Type 300 Series stainless steel hardware, except aluminum
enclosures may have aluminum or aluminum alloy hinges.
C. Enclosures and junction boxes having an internal volume exceeding 2000 cubic
centimeters (122 cubic inches) shall be provided with Type 300 Series stainless steel
breather and drain fittings.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches
mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick,
stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and straight
sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in
exposed masonry walls.
B. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations use cast metal, threaded hub type boxes
with gasketed weatherproof covers:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover
gaskets may be omitted in dry locations).
3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.
4. At food preparation equipment within four ft. of steam connections.
5. Where indicated.
C. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated.
Mount boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but consistently either
way. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span different types of
building finishes either vertically or horizontally. Locate boxes for switches near doors
on the side opposite the hinges and close to door trim, even though electrical floor
plans may show them on hinge side.
D. Ceiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4-inches
square by 1-1/2-inches deep, minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.
F. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean
foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.
G. Concrete Boxes: Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without
interfering with reinforcing, but do not use such boxes with over 6-inch depth.
H. Floor Boxes: When required and indicated on the drawing,, install in concrete floor
slabs so they are completely enveloped in concrete except for the top. Where normal
slab thickness will not envelop box as specified above, provide increased thickness of
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
the slab. Provide each compartment of each floor box with grounding terminal
consisting of a washer- in-head machine screw, not smaller than no. 10-
32, screwed into a tapped hole in the box. Adjust covers of floor boxes flush with
finished floor.
I. Existing Outlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new
mounting holes in the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes
where existing holes are not aligned.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8-
inches square by 4-inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in
a single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in
pull or junction box shall not exceed the following:
Size of Maximum no. of

Largest Conductors Conductors in
in Box Box
No. 4/0 AWG 30

250 MCM 20
B. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured.
Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30-
inches inside boxes.
C. Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling.
D. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at least
50 percent larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated.
Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or
cables of types normal for such systems.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES
A. Mount with fronts straight and plumb.
B. Install with tops 78-inches above floor.
C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls, unless indicated shown otherwise.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3.06 GROUNDING
a. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item
includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the
cabinet, box or enclosure.
3.07 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and

construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions
and weld marks.
B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray
manufacturer.
C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16143
WIRING DEVICES




Page 1 of 5
ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ManufacturerS
2.02 Wiring Devices
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Wiring Devices and Accessories

3.02 Protection
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following:
Receptacles
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
Toggle Switches
Photo Cell Relays
Lighting Contactors
1. SAUDI Electricicty Transmission Engineering Specification (TES)
TES-P-119.25 Lighting and Recepticles for Substation yard & building
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by
UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1 Specifications Sections.
1. Product data for each type of wiring devices and coverplates.
2. Samples.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
General Electric Co.

Hubbell Inc.
Lutron
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.02 WIRING DEVICES
A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and

electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with
NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide ivory color
devices and wall plates except as otherwise indicated.
B. Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1. Unless otherwise indicated,

provide duplex receptacles rated NEMA 5-20R duplex, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, 125
volts.
1. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy Duty: Provide pin and sleeve design

receptacles conforming to UL 498. Comply with UL 1010 where installed in
hazardous locations. Provide features indicated.
2. Ground-Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: Provide ground-fault circuit

interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle. Provide
unit designed for installation in a 2- 3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter,
grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3.
C. Toggle Switches:. Comply with UL 20 and NEMA WD1. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide quiet type AC switches rated 20 A, 120/277 V, 1 pole, heavy duty.
D. Wall Plates: Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as
indicated. Provide stainless steel plates for areas subject to hard usage or open to
the public.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring
installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris.
D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
E. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
F Tighten connectors and terminals, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply
with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque
indicating hand tool.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from damage.
B. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.
A. Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.
Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
B. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with

requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.
C. Test GFI receptacle operation with both local and remote fault simulations in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16150
ELECTRICAL MOTORS




Page 1 of 12
ELECTRICAL WORKS ELECTRICAL MOTORS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.02 Standards
1.04 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Selection of Motors
2.02 Components and Equipments
2.03 Duty
2.04 Dimensions
2.05 Noise Requirements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Tagging
3.02 Medium Voltage Motors
3.03 Low Voltage Motors
3.04 Painting
3.05 Installation
3.06 Workshop Test
3.07 Site Test
3.08 Documentation
3.09 Shipping

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
installation, test and commissioning of electrical motors for medium and low voltage for the
Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold mines.
1.02 Standards
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of electrical

motors shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least. The latest
IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines
IEC 60072 Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
ISO 15 Rolling bearings - Radial bearings - Boundary dimensions, general Plan

ISO 281 Rolling bearings - Dynamic load ratings and rating life
contract.
The electrical motors shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation at full load
1.04 Tchnical Data
The technical data of the electrical motors are defined in the data sheets. The Contractor has
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Selection of Motors
In general it shall be the responsibility of the driven equipment manufacturer to select and co-
ordinate the required motor type. This includes the co-ordination of the performance data

15 Mar, 2011
(motor speed, shaft power and direction of rotation) as also the mechanical construction and
coupling requirements.
The motors shall be designed as squirrel cage motor and shall be of industrial type.
If not specified otherwise the actual power output of the motors must be selected to meet the
maximum required shaft power of the driven equipment, multiplied by a factor of 1.2 for
motors up to 250 kW and 1.15 for motors above 250 kW and using the next larger standard
motor size.
Motors shall be entirely suitable for outdoor installation without any additional
protection.
Lifting lugs and drain hole for condensation shall be provided on all motors.
The motors shall be suitable to deliver rated power continuously at
10% nominal voltage and rated frequency,
Nominal voltage and 5% of rated frequency,
10% combined variation of nominal voltage and frequency, with frequency

variation 5%.
The type of MV motors (fixed or variable speed) has to be specified. In case variable
speed motors are selected, speed control mode of operation need to be detailed.
guaranteed.
2.03 Duty
The motors shall be designed for continuous running duty, S1 according to IEC, at the
specified conditions.
Motors connected to electric / electronic speed control or start-up equipment such as

frequency converters or start-up transformers have to be selected / matched to the special
requirement of such duty.

15 Mar, 2011
2.04 Dimensions
All motors of the same size shall be interchangeable. The motor dimensions shall be in
accordance with IEC 60072.
2.05 Noise Requirements
The sound pressure level of electrical motors shall not exceed 85 dB (A) @ 1 m under no load
conditions.
maintenance issues.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Tagging
For further requirements, reference is made to specification Basic Electrical Requirements.
3.02 Medium Voltage Motors
Motor Start and Torque Requirements
The motors shall be designed for direct on-line starting at full load; the starting current shall
not exceed 5.5 times the rated current.
The motors shall not break out if during normal operation the voltage at the motor terminals
remains 0.8 UN, but the operation at 0.8 UN shall be limited to 10 seconds.
The motors shall be designed to allow 4 starts successively from cold (max. ambient
temperature) or 3 starts successively from hot service temperature without tripping of any
protection device.

15 Mar, 2011
Insulation / Winding Protection
The motors shall have tropicalied insulation. The motors shall be designed for class F
insulation, thermal utilization of the motors shall be for class B only. The Motors shall be
designed for operation in isolated neutral or unearthed systems.
Therefore the level of insulation required shall be suitable for this condition. The stator
winding shall be insulated by high quality modern synthetic resin insulation system based on
mica-glass tape. After insertion of the coils into the stator core the whole winding shall be
vacuum impregnated with epoxy resin, free from any solvent.
The allowable impulse-stress-voltage for the insulation system shall meet the requirements of
IEC 60034 part 15.
The motors shall be designed for re-acceleration against 100% residual field at phase
opposition.
In each stator winding phase at least two (2) Pt 100 temperature elements (4-wire system)
shall be imbedded at the hottest place and wired to the auxiliary terminal box.
The motors shall be equipped with surge arrestors, which are to be installed in the motor
stator connection terminal box. The surge arrestor design must match to the actual network
configuration, the used circuit breakers and the connected cable arrangement. If technically
recommended additional surge arrestors shall be installed at the MCC side for cable
protection during vacuum circuit breaker switching.
Method of Cooling
The motor cooling shall be according to the data sheets, either air cooled or with air/water
heat exchanger.
If the motor cooling will be performed via an air/water heat exchanger, the water outlet of the
heat exchanger shall be equipped with a thermostat or an equivalent device for control of
water temperature and flow. Equipment room on suitable racks.
Current Transformers for Differential Protection
For all motors with a rating at 2000 KW or above a differential relay for winding protection
shall be provided and installed in the associated MCC. In that case the star-point connection
shall be brought out separately to terminals box and three current transformers at motor end
shall be provided, one for each winding between line and neutral side at motor. The
differential current transformers shall be designed to class 5P10 or class X to BS with a rating
matched to the protection system. The CTs shall be provided by the motor supplier and
accommodated in the star-point terminal box.
The current transformers for the motors and as well the current transformers for installation
inside of MV MCC shall be delivered by the motor manufacturer.

15 Mar, 2011
The current transformers for motors must be installed prior to workshop tests. The current
transformers for the MV MCC shall be handed over to MCC manufacturer before workshop
tests of the respective MCC.
Bearings
The motors shall be fitted with ball or rolling contact bearings, supplied with life time grease.
Grease regulator and nipples, as also surplus grease discharge openings shall be provided if
required.
For larger motors, self-cooled sleeve bearings are acceptable, too. Sleeve bearings shall be
equipped with oil ring lubrication; the bearing housings shall have an oil level indication.
External lube oil systems shall only be used, if necessary and shall be combined with the lube
oil system of driven equipment.
Temperature monitoring with Pt 100 temperature elements (4-wire) is required for the
bearings.
Terminal Boxes
A stator connection terminal box shall be provided and fitted with terminals, including surge
arrestors and cable glands for the connection of the actual number and type of cables.
Dimension of cable glands shall be as per requirement. Pressure relief flaps shall be
foreseen.
Auxiliary terminal boxes with terminals and cable glands for current transformers,
instrumentation and anti condensation heater connection shall be foreseen.
Surge arrestors shall be installed for all monitoring instrument circuits.
Anti Condensation Heater
The motors shall be equipped in general with electrical anti condensation heaters, to be
switched on if the motor circuit breaker is off.
The voltage level for the anti condensation heater shall be 1 x 230 V AC, 60 Hz.
3.03 Low Voltage Motors
Motor Start and Torque Requirements
The motors shall be designed for direct on-line starting at full load. For motors of 132 kW
shaft power and above, the starting current shall not exceed 5.5 times the rated current.
The motors shall not break out if during normal operation the voltage at the motor terminals
remains greater than 0.8 UN, but the operation at 0.8 UN shall be limited to 10 seconds.

15 Mar, 2011
The motors shall be designed to allow 4 starts successively from cold (max. ambient
temperature) or 3 starts successively from hot service temperature without tripping of any
protection device.
Insulation / Winding Protection
The motors shall have tropicalised insulation. The motors shall be designed for class F
insulation, thermal utilisation of the motors shall be for class B only.
The stator winding shall be insulated by high quality modern synthetic resin insulation system
based on mica-glass tape. After insertion of the coils into the stator core the whole winding
shall be vacuum impregnated with epoxy resin, free from any solvent.
The motors shall be designed for re-acceleration against 100% residual field at phase
opposition.
Motors of a rated power of 90 kW and above shall be equipped with winding protection by
means of embedded positive temperature coefficient thermistors.
Two thermistors per phase (one set service one set spare) shall be provided and wired to
the auxiliary terminal box.
Method of Cooling
Motors shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled by ambient air, equivalent to cooling code
IC0141 or IC0151 according to IEC 60034 part 6.
Bearings
The motors shall be fitted with ball or rolling contact bearings, supplied with life time grease.
Grease regulator and nipples, as also surplus grease discharge openings shall be provided if
required.
Self-cooled sleeve bearings are acceptable, too. Sleeve bearings shall be equipped with an
oil ring lubrication, the bearing housings shall have an oil level indication.
External lube oil systems for LV motors will not be accepted.
Terminal Boxes
Terminal boxes shall be provided and fitted with terminals and cable glands for the connection
of the actual number and type of cables. Dimension of cable glands as per requirement.
If required, auxiliary terminal boxes with terminals and cable glands for instrumentation and
anti condensation heater connection shall be foreseen.
All terminal boxes shall be IP55 enclosure type.

15 Mar, 2011
Anti Condensation Heater
Motors with 90 kW rated power and above shall be equipped in general with electrical anti
condensation heaters, to be switched on if the motor circuit breaker is off.
The voltage level for the anti condensation heater shall be 1 x 230 V AC, 60 Hz.
3.04 Painting
The painting shall be as per the approved manufacturer standard at least consisting of:
One coat of two-component epoxy zinc chromate rust-inhibiting primer,

One intermediate coat of two-component epoxy primer,
Two top coatings for two-component resin, color as per the approved color code
schedule.
Total thickness of dry protective paint coating shall be at least 120 m.
All paint coatings shall be resistant against temperature conditions up to 140 C and
intermittently up to 180 C.

3.05 Installations
Installation and alignment shall be carried out in accordance with the instructions and
recommendations of the manufacturer and with due regard to the requirements of the driven
machine.
3.06 Workshop Tests
All motors shall be tested completely and detailed in manufacturers workshop. All tests
accordance with the Project Procedure Manual.
All motors shall be subjected to at least the abbreviated tests in accordance with the
applicable standard test procedures.
Complete tests on motors up to 90 kW will not normally be required if evidence of type tests
on identical machines is produced at the time of quotation.
For machines of 90 kW and above it will be acceptable that complete tests are made on only
one of several identical machines with abbreviated tests on the remaining machines.

15 Mar, 2011
The following tests shall be performed, at least:
a) Abbreviated tests (routine tests)
Measurement of no-load losses at rated voltage and frequency,

Measurement to allow calculation of locked rotor current and torque,
High voltage tests plus insulation resistance test,
Inspection (at no-load) of bearings and mechanical operation of motor,
Vibration,
High voltage and continuity tests on built-in temperature detectors,
Bearing insulation integrity (if applicable).
b) Complete test (full tests)
Measurement of winding resistance (cold and hot),

Measurement of no-load losses at rated voltage and frequency,
Measurement to allow calculation of locked rotor current and torque,
Full load heat run,
High voltage test after heat run and insulation resistance before and
after heat run,
Inspection (at full load) of bearings and mechanical operation of motor,
Measurement of slip at full load,
Measurement to allow calculation of pull-out torque,
Measurement to allow calculation of starting torque,
Measurement to allow calculation of efficiency at full, three quarter and
half load,
Measurement to allow calculation of power factor at full, three quarter
and half load,
Vibration,
Noise,
High voltage and continuity tests on built-in temperature detectors,
together with tests to demonstrate satisfactory operation and
compliance with stated characteristics,
Bearing insulation integrity (if applicable).
Type test certificates for LV motors will be acceptable, if the same type and rating of motor is
covered.
3.07 Site Tests

15 Mar, 2011

Test runs,
Performance tests.
3.08 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the motors and its
components.
The documentation of motors shall include the following documents and drawings (minimum
requirements):
a) Layout drawings
b) Wiring diagrams
c) Termination drawings
d) Technical data sheets
e) Calculations, protocols, certificates
f) Spare parts list
g) Performance curves
h) Operation and maintenance manual

i) Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.
sufficient time allocated for approval prior to manufacturing / assembly.
Documentation has to be prepared in accordance with the relevant ISO.

with the Client.
3.09 Shipping
Motors shall be coupled with the respective work machine before shipping.

15 Mar, 2011

The following special tools shall be supplied:
One digital HV Insulation resistance testing kit (Megger) with PI measuring facilitity
Four digital LV Insulation resistance testing kit (Megger)
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16160
ENCLOSURES




Page 1 of 5
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 References
1.04 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer
2.02 Hinged Cover Enclosures
2.03 Terminal Blocks
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
3.02 Installation
Rev. A
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Hinged Cover Enclosures.
B. Terminal Blocks.
C. Accessories.
A. Section 16170 Circuit and motor disconnects
B. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

maximum)
B. NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures.
B. Manufacturer's Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

Instructions: stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of
product.
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
a. Furnish products that complies with underwriters laboratories (UL) standard

acceptable to Client as suitable for purpose specified and shown or products
manufactured to IEC standard which are exact equivalent to UL standard.
b. Approval and acceptable by Client.
Rev. A
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Refer to Approved Manufacturers List.
2.02 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction : NEMA 250 Steel enclosure.
Non-Classified Area : Type 1 for indoor dry locations.

Type 4X for outdoor locations.
B. Gasketed Covers : Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable

key.
C. Provide Interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;
finish with white enamel.
D. Enclosure Finish : Manufacturer's standard enamel.
E. Construction : 12 gauge (mm) steel, seams continuously welded,

surface flat, smooth and rigid.
2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Manufacturers : Refer to Approved Manufacturers List.
B. Terminal Blocks : ANSI / NEMA ICS 4.
C. Power Terminals : Unit construction type with closed back and tubular
pressure screw connections, rated 600 Volts.
D. Signal and : Modular construction type, suitable for channel

mounting, Control Terminals with tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 300 Volts.
E. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and provide sufficient support.
Rev. A
15 Mar, 2011
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates in accordance with Section 16195.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural support at
each corner.
D. Ground or Bond Enclosure in accordance with Section 16170.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. A
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS




Page 1 of 5
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer
2.02 Circuit and Motor Disconnect Switches
2.03 Accessories
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects (otherwise known as enclosed
switches, disconnects, disconnect switches or safety switches).
A. Code and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards including, but
1. TES-P-104 Underground Cable Engineering Standards
2. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with

ANSI/NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by
UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1 Specifications Sections.
1. Product data for each type of product specified.
2. Maintenance data for circuit and motor disconnects, for inclusion in Operation
and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 16 Section 16010 "Basic
Electrical Requirements"
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

offering products which shall be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following:

following:
Appleton
Cutler-Hammer Inc.
Furnas Electric Co.
General Switch Corp.
Square D Company.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.02 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties,
features, ratings, and enclosures as indicated. For motor and motor starter
disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.
B. Non-Fusible Disconnects: Heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as

indicated.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in

switches as indicated.
B. Captive Fuse Pullers: Provide built-in fuse pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
General: Follow switch manufacturers' printed installation instructions. Comply with the
provisions of the NEC and TES-P-104 requirements and installation conditions. In addition,
comply with the following:
A. In outdoor non-industrial areas, equipment and terminal enclosures shall be either one
of the following:
1. NEMA Type 3R, 3 or 4

2. IEC 529 Type IP34 or better
B. Enclosures that are rated (a) NEMA Type 3, 4 or 4X, or (b) IEC 529 Type IP54, or
better, shall have Type 300 Series stainless steel hardware, except aluminum
enclosures may have aluminum or aluminum alloy hinges.
C. Enclosures and junction boxes having an internal volume exceeding 2000 cubic
centimeters (122 cubic inches) shall be provided with Type 300 Series stainless steel
breather and drain fittings.
A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches,

energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load.
However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit
unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses
installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective units with new units and retest.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEM




Page 1 of 5
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEM
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 References
1.04 Sumittals
1.06 Coordination
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Cords and Caps
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examinations
3.02 Electrical Connections
3.03 Equipment Connection Schdule
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections.
A. Section 16110 Raceways.
B. Section 16120 Wires and Cable.
C. Section 16135 Cabinets,Boxes & Fittings.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. TES-P-104
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing

dimensions, configurations, and construction.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 and TES-P-104.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, SAMSS as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for
equipment furnished under other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule

for equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carol Cable Co. Division, Model: 02725
2. ITT Royal Electric Division, Model: PC10205
3. Manhattan Electric Cable Corp., Model: M2773
B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for

equipment.
D. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type SO multi conductor flexible cord with
identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch
circuit overcurrent protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible
conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.
D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide
cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes
and equipment connection boxes.
F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as

indicated.
G. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where
indicated.
3.03 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE
A. As per scope of work and SAMSS Standards.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION




Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Electrical Identification Products
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It

includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the
following:
A. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors.
B. Operational instruction signs.
C. Warning and caution signs.
D. Equipment labels and signs.
1. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply

with ANSI/NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1,

"Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size
of lettering for raceway and cable labels.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1 Specification Sections:
1. Product Data for each type of product specified.
B. For unusually complex projects such as laboratories, communication centers and

utility plants, provide the following:
1. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and

labels.
2. Samples of each color, lettering style, and other graphic representation

required for identification materials; samples of labels and signs.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

the following:

following:
Calpico, Inc.
Cole-Flex Corp.
Emed Co., Inc.
George-Ingraham Corp.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Kraftbilt
LEM Products, Inc.
Markal Corp.
National Band and Tag Co.
Panduit Corp.
Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp.
Seton Name Plate Co.
Standard Signs, Inc.
W.H. Brady Co.
2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways of Certain Systems: Self-adhesive

vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.
B. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway

Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged
to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway.
C. Wire/Cable Designation Markers: Permanently embossed wire markers of the heat-

shrinkable or slip-on type. Wrap-around, rigid snap-on, or adhesive type markers are
not permitted.
D. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock

melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches,
or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters
on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
E. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum
signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.
F. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-

fading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gauge, galvanized steel
backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch
grommets in corners for mounting.
G. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws
or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
H. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self- locking nylon cable ties,
0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a
temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors
when used for color coding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other

designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations
specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals
and as required by code.
B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and

requirements of NEC.
C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require

finish, install identification after completion of finish work.
D. Conduit Identification:
1. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or

accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be
pre-tensioned, snap-around colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking
tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide,
completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings
in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations
of walls and floors, and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply
the following colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red

b. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow
c. Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen's Report System: Red and Blue
d. Watchmen's Report System: Blue
e. Security System: Blue and Yellow
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
f. Civil Defense System: Yellow

g. Clock System: Green
h. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue
I. Telephone System: Green and Yellow
E. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code-required caution sign for boxes
shall be pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black,
preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box
covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure- sensitive plastic labels at
exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed
boxes.
F. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit
conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:
Phase 208y/120 Volts 460y/277 Volts
A Black Yellow
B Red Brown
C Blue Orange
Neutral White White
Ground Green Green
2. For specified insulations and jackets not manufactured by the selected vendor
with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color-
code with Scotch No. 35 color-coding tape or equivalent. Color-code each
conductor entering every box, cabinet, panelboard, through, and wireway. In
wireways and other locations where conductors are accessible, color-code
conductors every 1500mm (5 FT).
3. The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of

factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.
a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half- lapped turns for a

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to
prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-wide tape in colors as
specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping.
Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.
b. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for

color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at
each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal spaced
3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit,
and cut off excess length.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
4. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable

markers at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors
appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent
letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable markers.
G. Match identification markings with designations used in panel boards shop drawings,
Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the
facility's electrical installations.
H. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:
1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where

indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect.
Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend
where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment
operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white

legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency
instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.
3. All signs must be in English and has Arabic translation.
I. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows:
1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic- laminate on each

major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of
each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems,
unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as
otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2-inch-high lettering on
1-1/2-inch-high label (2-inch-high where two lines are required), white lettering
in black field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract
Documents and drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following
categories of electrical equipment:
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Panelboard.
Motor starters.
Pushbutton stations.
Contactors.
Control devices.
Transformers.
2. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for

disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers,
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except
panel boards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified
elsewhere. For panel boards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with
explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual
breaker.
J. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16250
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH




Page 1 of 9
ELECTRICAL AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 References
1.03 System Description
1.04 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Mechanically Held Transfer Switch
2.02 Bypass Isolation Switch
2.03 Microproccessor Control Panel
2.04 Emclosures
2.05 Voltage and Frequency Sensing
2.06 Time Delay
2.07 Additional Features
2.08 Testing
PART 3 EXECUTION
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A IEEE C37.90.1 Surge Withstanding Capability (SWC) Test for Protective

Relays and Relay Systems
B IEEE 446 Emergency & Standby Power System
C NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Controls and Systems
D NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
E NEMA ICS 10 AC Automatic Transfer Switches
F NEMA ICS 6 Enclosure for Industrial Control and Systems
G NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
H UL 1008 Automatic Transfer Switches
I NFPA 99 Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
J NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems

A. Section 16620: Standby Power Generator Systems
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install automatic closed transition & bypass-isolation switch ACTS/BPS
with number of poles, amperage, voltage, and withstand current ratings as shown on
the plans. Each ACTS/BPS system(s) shall consist of a closed transition transfer
switch and a two-way bypass/isolation switch. All ACTS/BPSs and control modules
shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
B. The ACTS/BPS shall transfer the load without interruption (closed transition) by
momentarily connecting both sources of power only when both sources are
acceptable and present. The maximum interconnection time is 100 milliseconds. The
ACTS shall operate as a conventional break-before-make (open transition) switch
when the power source serving the load fails. Designs that transfer in a delayed
transition manner (intentional delay in the neutral position) when closed transition
transfer is bypassed are not acceptable.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings
B. Design Data
C. Manufacturers Catalog Data
D. Instruction
E. Operation and Maintenance Manual
F. Factory Test Reports
G. Field Test Reports
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH

A. The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operator shall be a solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized. Main
operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices will not be accepted.
B. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages so that
contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at the
contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
C. All main contacts shall be of silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and
above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand current
capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
D. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A
manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The handle
shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at any point throughout their
entire travel to inspect and service the contacts when required.
E. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts

thereof which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer
between two active power sources are not acceptable.
F. Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans, the ACTS shall
be provided with fully-rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the
normal and emergency power sources shall be connected together only during the
transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected together until power source
contacts close on the source to which the transfer is being made. The overlapping
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100 milliseconds. Neutral
switching contacts which are not overlapping are not acceptable.
G. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a

neutral conductor terminal plate with fully-rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be
provided.
2.02 BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH

A. A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either
source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load
power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven.
B. Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper bus bar. The only field installed
power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the bypass isolation
switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with disconnect plugs.
C. Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction
between the functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed and operable without
opening the enclosure door. Designs requiring insertion of loose operating handles or
opening of the enclosure door to operate are not acceptable.
D. Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no interruption of

power to the load (make before break contacts). Designs which disconnect the load
when bypassing are not acceptable. The bypass handle shall have three operating
modes: Bypass to Normal, Automatic, and Bypass to Emergency. The operating
speed of the bypass contacts shall be the same as the associated transfer switch and
shall be independent of the speed at which the manual handle is operated. In the
Automatic mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of the power so that they will not
be subjected to fault currents to which the system may be subjected.
E. The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: Closed, Test, and
Open. The Test mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power system,
including the automatic transfer switches with no interruption of power to the load.
The Open mode shall completely isolate the automatic transfer switch from all
source and load power conductors. When in the Open mode, it shall be possible to
completely withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to
conform to code requirements without removal of power conductors or the use of any
tools.
F. When the isolation switch is in the Test or Open mode, the bypass shall function as
a manual transfer switch of the load between the two sources.
G. Designs requiring operation of key interlocks for bypass isolation or ACTS which
cannot be completely withdrawn when isolated are not acceptable.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.03 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL PANEL
A. The control panel shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The sensing and
logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor in the panel for maximum
reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent serial communications capability.
The control panel shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting

wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the
control panel to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance.
B. The control panel shall be completely enclosed with a protective cover and be
mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance.
Sensing and control logic shall be provided on printed circuit boards. Interfacing
relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers.
C. The control panel shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) as follows:
6.1 Ring Wave Test per IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A)
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 801-2, Level 4

(ESD)
Electrical fast IEC 801-4, Level 4

Transients
(EFT)
Surge Withstand IEC 801-5, Level 4
Electromagnetic Mil Std 461. Class 3C

Interference
2.04 ENCLOSURE
A. The ACTS/BPS shall be furnished in a NEMA type 12 enclosure unless otherwise

shown on the plans.
2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SENSING
A. The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup
adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75% to 98% of
pickup setting for open transition operation.
B. Single-phase voltage sensing of the emergency source shall be provided, with pickup
voltage adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and independent frequency sensing
with pickup adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal for open transition operation.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
C. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 2% over an operating temperature

range of -200C to 700C.
D. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments without the
use of tools, meters or power supplies. Actual settings shall be clearly defined in the
operators manual.
E. An inphase monitor shall be provided for closed transition operation. The monitor
shall control transfer/retransfer between live sources so that closure on the alternate
source will occur only when the two sources are within 5 electrical degrees maximum,
5% maximum voltage difference, and 0.2 Hz maximum frequency difference.
F. Closed transition shall be accomplished with no power interruption and without

altering or actively controlling the standby generator set.
2.06 TIME DELAYS
A. A time delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and
delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6 second.
B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5

minutes for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
C. A time delay shall be provided on retransfer to normal, adjustable from 0 to 30

minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and
normal source is acceptable.
D. A time delay shall be provided on shutdown of engine generator for cooldown,

adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.
E. All time delays shall be fully adjustable without the use of tools.
2.07 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
A. A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 32 VDC shall be provided for a
low-voltage engine start signal.
B. A momentary-type test switch shall be provided to simulate a normal source failure.
C. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ACTS to
transfer to emergency.
D. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 380 VAC shall be provided consisting of one
contact, closed when the ACTS is connected to the normal source and one contact,
closed when the ACTS is connected to the emergency source.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
E. Indicating lights shall be provided, one to indicate when the ACTS is connected to the
normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ACTS is connected to the
emergency source (red).
F. A visual position indicator shall be provided to indicate bypass-isolation switch

position. Pilot lights shall indicate availability of power sources. A prominent and
detailed instruction plate shall be furnished.
G. Terminals shall be provided to indicate the actual availability of the normal and
emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing pickup and dropout
settings for each source.
H. Engine Exerciser -An engine generator exercising timer shall be provided, including a
selector switch to select exercise with or without load transfer. The exerciser shall be
programmable to enable exercise for 1 minute to 24 hours per day in 1 minute
increments for 1 to 7 days per week. The exercising timer shall be equal to ASCO
Accessory 11C.
I. Inphase Monitor - An inphase monitor shall be inherently built into the controls. The
monitor shall control transfer in the open-transition mode so that motor load inrush
currents do not exceed normal starting currents.
J. Communications Networks - A fully duplex RS485 interface shall be built into the
ACTS control panel to enable serial communications with remotely located
annunciators and/or network supervisors. The serial communication interface shall be
equal to ASCO Accessory 72A.
2.08 TESTING
In addition to other factory tests, each completely assembled ACTS/BPS unit shall be subjected to
dielectric and operational tests and withstand tests.
A. Withstand Test in Excess of UL 1008 Requirements: The ACTS/BPS shall be tested

and rated to withstand available fault or short circuit current.
B. Dielectric Tests: Tests shall be performed in accordance with NEMA ICS1. Wiring of
each control panel shall be subjected to voltage surge tests as stipulated in IEEE
C37.90.1. Impulse withstand rating tests shall be performed accordance with the
requirements of NEMA ICS 1.
C. Operational Tests: Tests shall be performed and shall demonstrate that the
operational sequence of each ACTS/BPS unit conforms to the requirements of the
specifications with regard to operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and timing
intervals.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Installation: The ACTS/BPS shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with

approved manufacturers instructions.
B. Operational Testing: The Operational Testing shall provide certified field test reports to
the Client Representative following successful completion of the operational tests.
The tests reports shall describe all adjustments and settings made and all operational
tests performed.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16300
LOW VOLTAGE MCC




Page 1 of 26
ELECTRICAL WORKS LOW VOLTAGE MCC
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
1.04 Environmental ConditionS
1.05 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 Tagging
2.04 Wiring
2.05 Cable and Cable Laying
2.06 Low Voltage MCC
2.08 Distribution Boards
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
3.02 Installation
3.03 Workshop Test
3.04 Type Test
3.05 Site Test
3.06 Documentation
3.07 Shipping

15 Mar, 2011
1.01 Scope
installation; test and commissioning of low voltage MCC form the stations for the
Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold sites.
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of low voltage
MCC shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least. The latest
IEC 60044 Instrument transformers
accessories
IEC 62271 Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthling switches
IEC 60044 Voltage transformers
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP-Code)
IEC 60439 Low voltage MCC and control gear assemblies
IEC 60664 Insulation co-ordination for equipment within low voltage systems
IEC 60715 Dimensions of low voltage MCC and control gear
IEC 60947 Low voltage MCC and control gear
IEC 61641 Enclosed low-voltage MCC and control gear assemblies

15 Mar, 2011
regulations.
1.03 Submittals

for:

building lines.

installed.


instructions.

15 Mar, 2011

instructions.
The low voltage switchboards shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation at
full load under the climatic and environmental conditions as described in the specification
Main MCC, main / sub distribution boards, low voltage MCC shall be installed inside electrical
buildings or rooms, which are equipped with air conditioning. Other distribution
boards/disconnect switches for special purposes can be installed in ventilated or non
ventilated rooms or in shafts.
The installation of switchboards at outdoor locations shall be avoided.
1.05 Technical Data
The technical data of the low voltage MCC are defined in the data sheets. The Contractor has
PART 2 PRODUCTS

guaranteed.
2.02 Tagging
screws.

15 Mar, 2011
2.04 Wiring
requirements. The wires shall be adequately rated and equipped with fuses / circuit breakers
of adequate size.
The wiring colors and the minimum cross sections shall be according to Specification for
Terminal strips shall have 10 % spare terminals. If wires with different potential will be
terminated on one terminal strip the respective terminals shall be separated by means of
isolating plates. The termination of multiple stranded wires has to be carried out by means of
multiple core cable ends.
connection point.
2.05 Cable and Cable Laying
For connection between different cabinets of one MCC or one distribution board copper
cables with PVC insulation shall be used.
All cables shall be selected according to load, insulation level, function and operating
requirements. The minimum cross section for power and signal cables shall be according to
specification Design and Construction of Power Supply Systems. Signal cables shall be
provided with copper screen.
2.06 LOW VOLTAGE MCC
Mechanical Requirements
General
The low voltage MCC shall be industrial type, metal-enclosed, factory assembled, type tested
MCC with self standing cabinets and withdrawable units.

15 Mar, 2011
The MCC shall be suitable for installation against the wall or for back-to-back installation. The
cabinets shall only be accessible from the front.
The bottom shall be covered with galvanized sheet steel, which is to provide with holes for
cable entry. The cable entries shall be designed in a manner such that a sealing after cable
laying is possible without any problem. Further, each cover sheet shall be equipped with a
grounding connection to the steel frame of cabinet.
The low voltage MCC shall be suitable for indoor installation on cable cellar.
All nuts for fixing of components shall be welded on the steel structure or threads will be
cutting in the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self cutting screws shall be avoided.
Hinged front doors shall be swinging out more than 90.
Separation
Each cabinet shall consist of bus bar compartment, cable termination compartment and
compartments for withdrawable units.
Each compartment shall be separated against the next compartment by means of steel
sheets. Only small openings for plugs, ventilation or air circulation are allowed.
The separation shall be carried out in a manner such that overpressures, caused by short-
circuit, will be safe compensated and that exist no danger for operation personnel and for
other parts of the MCC. The bus bar bushing from the bus bar compartment to the
compartments for withdrawable units shall be arc protected.
The bus bars shall be coated with insulation material.
Cable Termination Compartments
The cable termination compartments shall be run about the whole height of the cabinets, shall
only be accessible from the front and shall be separated against neighboring cabinets.
The cable termination compartments shall be equipped in a manner such that an easy cable
laying will be possible. For fixing of cables the respective rails shall be installed.

15 Mar, 2011
The width of the cable termination compartment shall be 400 mm, preferably. For each cable
termination compartment a hinged door shall be provided, which is running about the whole
cabinet length.
Additional cable termination shall also be possible during the operation of the MCC.
For cabinets, where air circuit breakers for incomers and coupling are installed, a cable
termination compartment about the whole length is not necessary.
Electrical Requirements
Bus Bars
The bus bars shall be selected according to the electrical requirements and shall be of high-
conductivity electrolytic copper.
The cabinets shall be equipped with bus bar systems consisting of 5 conductors.
All bus bars shall be located inside the bus bar compartment and shall have the same cross
sections throughout all cabinets. An additional PE bus bar shall be installed about the whole
length of the cable termination compartment.
Regarding the function either two bus bar sections will be provided or the MCC will be divided
into three bus bar sections. Each bus bar section shall get a separate supply with a coupling
possibility. The bus bars shall be equipped with an adequate number of earthing studs.
Operation Modes
For low voltage MCCs the following configurations are possible:
(1) Configuration 1 (for Transfer Pump Station)

Bus A fed from SEC network (Line 1) through transformer T301.
Bus B fed from SEC network (Line 2) through transformer T302
Bus A & Bus B coupled with a Bus Coupler.
Bus C fed from In-house Emergency Generator Set.
Bus C coupled with Bus A and Bus B through ATS.

15 Mar, 2011
(2) Configuration 2 (Master Pump Station)

Bus 1 fed from SEC network (Line 1) through transformer T4X01.
Bus 2 fed from SEC network (Line 2) through transformer T4X02.
Bus 1 and Bus 2 coupled with a Bus Coupler.
Bus A fed from station service transformer T201.
Bus B fed from In-house Emergency Generator Set.
Bus B coupled with Bus A through ATS.
(3) Configuration 3
Bus B fed from In-house Working Generator Set.
Bus A fed from In-house Stand-by Generator Set.
Bus A and Bus B coupled through ATS.
For the four configurations the following operation modes are applicable:
(1) Configuration 1
Under normal network conditions both bus bars (Bus A and Bus B)
sections will be supplied via the SEC network feeders in parallel
operation the coupling is closed and the main switch for generator
supply to Bus C is opened. Either Bus A or Bus B can bare full demand
load.
In case of voltage interrupt on any line / network feeder, other incomer
from SEC network can bear the full load and the coupling remains
closed. In case of both SEC network feeders interrupt the emergency
generator set starts with a respective time delay. After the emergency
generator is ready for taking over the load, the main switch for
generator supply closes and the essential loads will be fed via
generator set. After voltage return the normal network will be switched
on and the generator will be synchronized with the normal network.
After synchronizing the coupling will be closed and the main switch for
generator will open.
(2) Configuration 2
Under normal network conditions both bus bars (Bus 1 and Bus 2)
sections will be supplied via the SEC network feeders in parallel
operation the coupling is closed. In case of voltage interrupt on any line
/ network feeder, other incomer from SEC network can bear the full
load and the coupling remains closed.

15 Mar, 2011
Under normal operation Bus A is fed from station service transformer

(T201) whose primary is fed from Bus 1. In case of both SEC network
feeders interrupt, the emergency generator set starts with a respective
time delay. After the emergency generator is ready for taking over the
load, the main switch for generator supply closes and the essential
loads will be fed via emergency generator set. After voltage return the
normal network will be switched on and the generator will be
synchronized with the normal network. After synchronizing the coupling
will be closed and the main switch for generator will open.
(3) Configuration 3
Under normal network conditions both buses are fed from working
generator and the coupling being closed. . In case of working
generators failure, the standby generator set starts with a respective
time delay. After the standby generator is ready for taking over the full
load, the main switch for generator supply closes and the full load will
be fed via standby generator set.
After the working generator returns to service, the working generator
will be switched on and the generator will be synchronized with the
normal network. After synchronizing the coupling(s) will be closed and
the main switch for the standby generator opened.
The mentioned switching over shall be carried out by means of

automatic transfer switch devices. The switching over in case of
network interrupt shall be automatically with a delay time, adjustable
form 1 sec. to 30 sec. The switching back and stopping of emergency
generator shall also be carried out automatically, but with a manual
initiation from remote or local. For the Variants 1 and 2 it shall be
possible to select the preferred supply alternative from remote or local.
If after a voltage interrupt and voltage return the preferred supply
alternative is not present, it shall be possible to switch back to these
supply conditions with a manual initiation from remote or local.
Further, for a test of the generator set the automatic transfer switch
device shall switch the already synchronized generator on the network
and shall decouple the essential bus bar. The switching over to this
kind of supply and the switching back after test must be carried out
immediately without interrupt in the power supply of the consumers. If
during the test run the normal network fails, the system shall switch
over automatically to emergency supply.
For smooth operation of the emergency generator (working generator)
in case of network break down and test of the generator set the

15 Mar, 2011
following signals shall be transferred between automatic transfer switch

device and generator set control device:
a) From automatic transfer switch device to generator set control device

Generator set start
Generator set stop
Voltage value for synchronization
b) From generator set control device to automatic transfer switch device

Generator set not available
Emergency shutdown
Ready for taking over the load
Synchronized to network
Switching over to generator supply/network supply (for
test of generator set)
The signal generator set start shall also be used to initiate the changing of generator set
sequence during test to automatic operation mode.
The automatic transfer switch devices shall be a programmable logic control unit and shall be
placed in the cabinet of coupling of the respective MCC. To prevent an automatically
switching, a lockable hand/automatic switch must be provided. By means of this switch the
local operation of all in feed circuit breakers and coupling circuit breakers shall be possible.
The signal emergency shutdown from generator set shall be forwarded to the respective
circuit breaker to initiate the switching off. The circuit must be hard wired.
The situation, those two incomers from normal network feed on coupled MCC, must be
avoided.
Control and Monitoring
The control and monitoring shall be carried out via hardwired components and with digital and
analogue signals between the parts of the MCCs and from/to the station control system.
The Contractor may provide the MCCs with a programmable control and monitoring system,
which has serial connections between the different parts and to the station control system.

15 Mar, 2011
For this kind of control and monitoring system the reliability must be in accordance with the
hardwired system (redundancy, each bus bar section equipped with separate RTU and
separate connection with station control system, etc.).
Control Voltage
The control voltage supply will be carried out from a 230 V AC UPS. Each bus bar section of
the respective low voltage MCC will be provided with one power supply, protected by means
of a 25 A miniature circuit breaker situated in the UPS Distribution Board. The sub-distribution
of control voltage shall be carried out selective from the cabinet equipped with the incomer to
the other cabinets of the bus bar section.
The digital signals from and to the remote control system will be transferred with a voltage
level of 24 V DC. All coils of coupling relays and all potential free contacts shall be suitable for
this voltage.
Overvoltage Protection
For protection against overvoltage from network side the incomers of MCCs shall be
equipped with overvoltage protectors.
For all electronic devices inside the MCCs additional overvoltage protection shall be provided.
Cable Termination
The cable termination compartments shall be equipped with terminals for power cables,
cables for control and signal voltage supply and cables for signal connection. For each
withdrawable unit separate terminal stripes shall be provided. The terminals shall be selected
according to nominal current and conductor cross section, but shall be at least for a conductor
cross section of 4 mm and a nominal current of 16 A.
For all incoming or outgoing feeders, which require more than two parallel cables, parallel
connection bars or parallel terminal shall be installed.
For signal connection, copper shielded or copper screened cables will be used.
By means of suitable measures shall be ensured, that the shields / screens of these cables
can be adequate grounded.

15 Mar, 2011
Protection Relays
All protection relays shall be of the latest state-of-the-art technology, electronic type,
programmable with displays of operating and set point values along with self test facility, etc.
visible without the need to open the door.
The relays shall be either arranged for panel installation behind the doors or windows of the
individual withdrawable units or integrated in the circuit breaker.
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with a three-phase, overcurrent time relay with
continuously variable short-circuit trip (including time delay for relay protection coordination).
Incomers from emergency generator sets with a power above 150 kVA shall be equipped with
differential protection relays.
Current Transformers
\
The thermal withstand capability of the current transformers shall be based on a
disconnection time of min. 0.5 sec. in the outgoing feeders to consumers and min. 1.0 sec. in
the incomers.
The transformer shall have the following data:

Measurement class 1.0 M 5
Protection class 10 P 10
Secondary current 1 A
Primary current according to the requirements
Cast-resin insulated, corona-free transformers shall be used. The current transformers must
withstand the dynamic and thermal short-circuit stresses.
For protection and measurement separate cores shall be provided.

Current transformer terminals shall be equipped with short-circuiting links.
Current transformers for differential protection of emergency generator sets will be procured
by the gen. set manufacturer and handed over prior to workshop test.

15 Mar, 2011
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Each cabinet of MCCs shall be equipped with anti-condensation heaters, which shall be fed
from the 230 V, 60 Hz level. Each bus bar section of the respective low voltage MCC will be
provided with one power supply, protected by means of a 16 A or 25 A miniature circuit
breaker situated in a low voltage distribution board. The sub-distribution of voltage for heaters
shall be carried out selective from the incomer cabinets to the other cabinets of the bus-bar
section.
The heaters shall be humidity or temperature controlled.
A failure of heaters shall be indicated on local indicator board. Heater indicator lamp ON
shall be provided.
General Description of withdrawable Units
The withdrawable units shall be standardized units with different sizes according to power
and kind of consumer.
Completion and wiring shall be carried out according to the following description and the
single line diagrams. All devices inside of withdrawable units shall be functionally placed.
A withdrawl or an engage of the withdrawable units must only be possible with opened power
circuit. To meet this requirement a mechanical/electrical interlocking shall be provided for
each withdrawable unit.
The withdrawable units shall be distributed in a manner such that the nominal current of the
distribution bus bars will not be exceeded.
Withdrawable Air Circuit Breaker
Air circuit breakers shall be withdrawable without use of special tools. The withdrawable units
shall be supported from the frame as far as the whole unit can be lifted out. The switch
position of circuit breaker shall be discernible from outside, also if the front door is closed.
For the air circuit breakers a defined operating position, test position and outside position
shall be provided which shall be discernible from outside, too.

15 Mar, 2011
In test position the main contacts shall be opened, but the control circuits shall be in function.
The operation of air circuit breakers shall be carried out via motor driven spring loaded
buffers. In case of control voltage fault the buffers shall be manually operable.
Each withdrawable circuit breaker unit shall be provided with separate miniature circuit
breakers for the following functions:
Local control and interlocks,
Local signals and faults indications,
Local power supply to motor drive,
A tripping of the mentioned miniature circuit breakers shall be indicated locally.
For monitoring from the station control system the following signals shall be provided:
Circuit breaker On,
Circuit breaker Off,
Circuit breaker in operating position,
Circuit breaker in test position,
Circuit breaker in outside position,
Overcurrent / short circuit tripping,
Undervoltage tripping (only for incomers),
Differential protection released (gen sets above 150 kVA),
No control voltage,
No bus bar voltage (only for incomers),
Feeder line under voltage (only for incomers),
Summary alarm.
The signals shall be wired to a common terminal strip. For remote control the respective
signals shall be wired to the circuit breakers, too.
To prevent a remote control a lockable local / remote switch shall be installed.
Air circuit breakers shall be equipped as follows:

Overload / short-circuit protection

15 Mar, 2011
For protection against overload a current-dependent, delayed releaser shall be used. The
setting range shall be from 0.2 to 1.2 of nominal current and the time delay adjustable from 2
to 30 seconds. For selective short-circuit protection an independent releaser shall be used.
The setting range shall be from 2 to 12 of the setting range of overload releaser. The delay
time of the independent releaser shall be adjustable.
Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage protection shall be realized with voltage relays. The relays shall have an
adjustable minimum operating voltage and an adjustable time delay (1-15 sec.).
In the front door of air circuit breaker compartments/cabinets the following devices shall be
installed:
One voltmeter for feeder voltage, single phase (only for

incomers),
One voltmeter for bus bar voltage, three phase with selector
switch,
Three ammeters,
One push button On,
One push button Off,
One indication light On,
One indication light Off,
One indication light Control voltage fault
One indication light Fault,
One push button Fault-receipting.
Air circuit breakers for coupling shall be equipped with the mentioned indication lights and
push buttons.
For measuring instruments only square flush-mounting types (class 1.5) shall be used.
Withdrawable Units for Consumers
General
For consumers the following withdrawable units shall be provided:

15 Mar, 2011
Motor direct on line,

Load isolator and fuses,
Circuit breaker.
The units shall be withdrawable without use of special tools. The withdrawable units shall be
supported from the frame as far as the whole unit can be lifted out.
For the units a defined operating position, test position and an outside position shall be
provided. In test position the main contacts shall be opened, but the control circuits shall be in
function.
Contactors shall be designed for category AC 3 and with a minimum power of 7.5 kW. An
operation of the coils shall be possible with voltages down to 75 % of nominal voltage.
Molded case circuit breakers can be used up to a size of 800 A, above 800 A air circuit
breakers shall be installed.
In general the circuit breakers will be hand operated. If required by process the circuit
breakers shall be provided with motor or magnetic drives.
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with motor or magnetic drives, if the connected consumers
are normal loads which shall be automatically switched off during emergency generator
supply. In this case the respective circuit breakers shall be controlled from the automatic
transfer switch device.
From all withdrawable units the operating position and a signal Unit not available (in test
position or withdrawn) shall be transferred to the station control system. For the different
types of withdrawable units further indications, operations and signalization shall be possible,
which are described in the following items.
The fuses of main circuits, if any, shall be equipped with fuse monitoring. The trip of a fuse
shall be indicated on the withdrawable unit and shall be transferred to the station control
system. In case of withdrawable units for motors the trip can be wired into the respective
failure indication/status signal circuit.
Motor direct on line (under 90 kW)
The power circuits of withdrawable units shall be equipped with the following main
components:
Fuses,

15 Mar, 2011
Load isolator (operable from the front of the unit), lockable,

Contactor,
Thermal overload relay.
The installation of moulded case circuit breakers instead of fuses is prefered. In this case the
trip signals shall be wired into the failure indication/status signal circuits.
The control circuits shall be equipped with control miniature circuit breakers, auxiliary relays,
coupling relays, indication lights and all other necessary devices to allow the control and
monitoring. Further, each control circuit shall be provided with facilities to integrate an
external emergency shutdown.
On the front of the withdrawable units the following indication lights shall be placed:
Contactor closed (red),
Contactor opened (green),
Failure (white or yellow).
Between station control system and withdrawable unit the following signals shall be
transferred:
a) Status signals:
Failure,
Contactor closed/opened,
No control voltage.
b) Commands:
Start motor,
Stop motor.
An operation possibility for the motor from the withdrawable unit shall not be provided.
Motor direct on line (90 kW and larger).
The withdrawable units shall be from the same configuration as described for motors under
90 kW, but with the following additional devices:
Circuit for anti-condensation heater of motor (with yellow
indication light on front on withdrawable unit for heater on),
Single-phase current indication with current transformer and
ammeter,

15 Mar, 2011
Monitoring device for positive temperature coefficient thermistors

of motor.
The release of monitoring device for positive temperature coefficient thermistors shall be
incorporated in the failure indication of withdrawable unit and in the failure signal to the station
control system.
Due to the size of motors the units can be provided with devices for star-delta start.
Load Isolator
The power circuit of withdrawable units shall be equipped with line side HRC fuses and load
isolators. The load isolators shall be operable from the front of the unit.
The installation of miniature circuit breakers or moulded case circuit breakers instead fuses is
prefered. As described above the trip signals shall be indicated on the withdrawable unit and
shall be transferred to the station control system, also.
Circuit Breaker
Withdrawable units with circuit breaker shall be provided for feeders of distribution boards
with large power consumption or boards where large motors are connected, to guarantee the
selectivity of the distribution system down to the consumer.
The circuit breakers shall be operable from the front of the unit. The control circuit shall be
equipped with control miniature circuit breaker, auxiliary relays, indication lights and all
necessary devices for local and remote monitoring.
If circuit breakers will be provided with motor or magnetic drives, the respective push buttons
for On and Off, local/remote key switches and facilities for remote control shall be installed.
On the front of the withdrawable units the following indication lights shall be placed:
Circuit breaker on (red),
Circuit breaker off (green),
Circuit breaker tripped (white),
Failure (yellow)
The indication lights for on / off may not be necessary, if the switch position is discernible by
means of other indications.

15 Mar, 2011
The following signals shall be transferred to the station control system:

Circuit breaker on/off,
Circuit breaker tripped,
Failure.
Reactive Power Compensation
Construction
All devices for the reactive power compensation shall be installed in a metal enclosed self
standing cabinet, which shall be from the same layout as the MCC. The connection with the
MCC shall be carried out either with bus bar or with cables.
In the hinged door the following devices shall be installed:
Reactive power regulator,
Varmeter (indication from 0.7 inductive to 0.7 capacitive),
Indicators for each capacitor bank.
The reactive power consumption shall be designed for compensation to a power factor of min.
0.9 inductive.
Capacitors
The capacitors shall have the following characteristics:

Low-loss
Self-cured,
Large life time,
High capacity continuance.
For rapid discharge the capacitors shall be equipped with drain coils. Further, each capacitor
module shall be equipped with fuses to isolate the module in case of failure.
Contactors
For switching only contactors shall be used, which can switch capacitive loads without
damage of the contacts.

15 Mar, 2011
Regulator
For the reactive power compensation a regulator with optimal dynamic characteristics shall be
used, that means, short alternations of load shall not lead to a constant switching of the
capacitor banks.
The conditions of the compensation unit (inductive, regulated, and capacitive) shall be
indicated on the regulator. A summary alarm shall be transferred to the station control system.
The hand operation of the capacitor banks in connection with a hand / automatic switch shall
be possible. In case of voltage interrupt all capacitors shall be switched off automatically. The
regulation shall continue two minutes after voltage return.
maintenance issues.
2.08 Distribution Boards
Distribution boards shall be industrial type, metal enclosed, factory assembled boards with
self standing or wall mounted cabinets. The cabinets shall be equipped with hinged doors and
fix mounted units and devices. The cabinets shall be accessible from the front only. Hinged
front doors shall be swinged out more than 90.
If cabinets will be mounted on raised floor or cable cellar, the bottom shall be covered with
galvanized steel sheets. Wall mounted cabinets shall be equipped with cable glands.
For distribution boards located in ventilated rooms, process rooms or outdoor, the cable
glands shall only be located in the bottom.
The cable termination compartments shall be located in the lower part of the distribution
boards. If for special boards (only for indoor dry rooms with air conditioning) a part of the
cables shall be carried to upwards, a cable compartment in the upper part can be provided,
too. The cable termination compartments shall be sized in a manner such that an easy cable
laying is possible and all cables can be sufficient fixed.

15 Mar, 2011
All nuts for fixing of units/ devices shall be welded on the steel structure or threads will be
cutted in the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self cutting screws is not allowed.
Construction
The distribution boards shall mainly consist of the following:
Bus bars (copper) in the upper part of the cabinets

Neutral bus bar (copper) in the lower part of the cabinet,
Grounding bus bar (copper) in the lower part of the cabinet,
Arrestors for all incoming feeders from the network and for bus bars,
Terminal strips for power and control cables connection,
Installation channels for internal wiring,
Fix installed equipment, mounted on supporting frames and rails,
Operation and supervision devices, mounted in the front door,
Flexible wires protected with flexible pipes from fixed part to the front door,
Document pocket in the door.
Completion and wiring of the distribution boards shall be carried out according to the
requirements. For main switches on-load isolator switches shall be used, preferably.
Outgoings to the consumers shall be equipped with miniature circuit breakers (up to 63A) or
moulded case circuit breakers. If necessary for special circuits, leakage current switches shall
be provided.
For external control and monitoring the respective potential free contacts shall be foreseen
and shall be wired on terminal stripe. In most of the cases the tripping of circuit breakers and
leakage current switches shall be transferred, only. Other signals shall be provided according
to the requirements (e. g. lighting panels).
All live parts within the cabinets, which will be entered during normal routine maintenance,
shall be protected by means of suitable covers.
The distribution boards shall be designed under consideration of spare place of at least 20 %
of the fully equipped boards.

15 Mar, 2011
Control Voltage
The control voltage shall be provided from a 230 V AC UPS, preferably. For remote
distribution boards or boards with secondary supply function control transformers may be
installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
All components and devices shall have a resistant, long term stable, high quality painting.
At least two layers have to be applied.
3.02 Installation
The delivery, installation and commissioning of the low voltage switchboards shall include, but
not limited to the following items:
Transport to location of installation (if necessary storage), and the
complete mounting,
Cable connections between the different cabinets of one switchboard,
Grounding and potential equalization for the cabinets, including connection
with the next grounding bus bars,
Termination of all cables at the switchboards,
Commissioning of the functioning switchboards, including voltage feeding
of the bus bars and adjustment of all relays, protection devices, etc.,
Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during
installation and commissioning phase and during training on site.
3.03 Workshop Tests
All components of the factory-assembled low voltage MCC shall be tested completely and
detailed in manufacturers workshop. All tests required by the codes and standards as well as
all manufactures tests have to be performed.
the tests.

15 Mar, 2011

Visual inspection,
Inspection of painting,
Check of passive and active protective measures,
Electrical test on the main circuits,
Mechanical operation tests on all equipment,
Operation tests of the protection relays, releasers and measuring equipment,
Circuit breakers interchangeability check,
Dielectric test of the auxiliary circuits,
Verification of wiring and terminal blocks.
3.02 Type Tests
Type tests and verifications according to IEC shall not be performed, if the Contractor
supplies a copy of the certified test results.
3.03 Site Tests

Performance test.
3.04 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the switchboards and their
components.

15 Mar, 2011
The documentation of the low voltage switchboards shall include the following documents and

b) Layout drawings for all devices and cabinets
c) Layout drawings for the whole switchboard
d) MCC/distribution board schedules
e) Single line diagrams
f) Bock diagrams
g) Wiring diagrams
h) Termination drawings
i) Cable lists
j) Spare parts list
k) Protection relay schedule, selectivity calculations
l) List of used devices with manufacturer
m) Software and software description
n) Operation and maintenance manual
o) Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.
Documentation has to be prepared in accordance with the relevant ISO standards.
with the Client.

15 Mar, 2011
3.05 Shipping
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged. Each MCC should be
shipped as a common delivery. The material, especially loose parts and spare parts shall be
clearly labeled according to the designation.
years operation time (see General Description for Project and Works).
All necessary special tools for operation and maintenance of the switchboards shall be
supplied for each switchboard, at least consisting of:
1 set of all special tools required for operation and maintenance of the
switchboard equipment
1 set of circuit breaker tools and consumables,
Circuit breaker lifting truck (for MCCs only),
Key set for cabinet doors and locks,
Magnetic warning labels in sufficient number, English and Arabic,
Software for protection relay parameter assignment (if any).
Ten multimeter with different range (Ohm-Voltage-Current-frequency)
Five AC clamp-meter
Five DC clamp-meter
For storage of the mentioned special tools per MCC a suitable cabinet, shelf or console shall
be delivered. The accessories for distribution boards can be stored within the shelf/console of
MCC.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16322
TRANSFORMERS




TRANSPORTATION OF TREATED WATER FROM TAIF TO MAADEN MINE SITES
Page 1 of 12
ELECTRICAL WORKS TRANSFORMERS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
1.05 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 Tagging
2.04 Equipment Characteristics
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
3.02 Marking
3.03 Installation
3.04 Workshop Test
3.05 Type Test
3.06 Site Test
3.07 Documentation
3.08 Shipping

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
installation, test and commissioning of distribution transformers and other auxiliary
transformers for the Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold sites.
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of transformers

shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least. The latest revision of
the publication referred to shall apply.
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60076 Power transformers
IEC 60137 Insulation bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC 60270 Partial discharge measurements
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
IEC 60076 Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers
As far as the power supply authority (SEC) and permits of other authorities require additional codes
and standards, respectively impose additional requirements, these are also part of the contract.

15 Mar, 2011
1.03 Submittals

for:
building lines.
installed.

instructions.
instructions.

15 Mar, 2011
The transformers shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation at full load
1.05 Technical Data
The technical data of the transformers are defined in the data sheets. The Contractor has to
guarantee the fulfillment of these requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
The Contractor has to take care that all components and equipments are selected
considering easy maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and long maintenance intervals.
guaranteed.
2.02 Tagging


15 Mar, 2011
Base Frame
The base frame shall be fitted with removable flat-rim wheels which can be arranged for either
longitudinal or cross travel. The base frame shall be welded to the tank bottom and shall be
equipped with four towing lugs.
Tank
The transformer tanks shall be welded and made of steel of the required thickness. All
welding seams shall be stress relieved and must withstand possible impacts during short
circuit without distortion.
The walls of the tanks shall be reinforced by stiffeners of structural steel. The tanks shall have
sufficient strength to withstand without any deformation, mechanical shocks during
transportation and oil filling by vacuum.
Gaskets and joints shall be weather proof, hot oil resistant, oil tight, water tight and
carefully designed for the relevant operating conditions.
Bolts and screws shall be used only. The employed metals shall be corrosion resistant. After
assembling, the screws shall receive normal protection by painting.
The tanks shall be equipped with radiators, bracketed and connected with piping to be tank
for natural oil circulation, which shall be welded into one piece.
The transformers shall be provided with suitable eyebolts and/or lugs for lifting the essential
parts and for lifting the completely assembled transformer.
Bushings
Bushings shall be absolutely oil-tight and shall be able to be maintained and replaced without
disassembling of the lid. They shall be provided to withstand, without damage all thermic and
dynamic stress to which they may be exposed to, as well as the specific conditions.
Bushings with full-thread stud bolts shall be provided with nuts and lock nuts made of brass
and lockwashers, permitting the connection of the conductor with a lug. Bushings with smooth
type stud bolts shall be provided with connection pieces allowing the connection of the
conductor with a lug.

15 Mar, 2011
The primary and secondary terminals of the transformers shall be designed to allow
connection with cables.
For primary and secondary cable connection the respective termination boxes with suitable
cable glands shall be provided. The terminal boxes shall have a degree of protection of IP 55.
Off-Load Tap Changers
The transformers shall be fitted with manual off-load tap changers on the primary side, which
are accessible from outside. The tap range shall be 0, 2.5, 5% of the rated primary voltage.
Cores
The core of the transformer shall be constructed from highest quality non-aging cold rolled
grain-oriented silicon steel. The transformer average sound level due to operation of the
transformer and accessories shall be determined in accordance with the IEC. Flux distortion
assembly shall be provided with suitable lugs for purposes of lifting of the entire assembly.
The core stack shall be earthed internally through grounding links located on top of the core.
Insulation
The insulation levels and the test voltages shall correspond with the different voltages of the
networks to which the transformers are connected.
The insulating oil shall confirm with the regulations, silting has to be prevented and only
mineral oil shall be used.
Insulation material according to IEC 60076 shall be provided. The selected class shall be
suitable for the environment temperature conditions.
Cooling
The transformers described in this specification shall be of natural air cooling type. The
cooling fluid shall be mineral oil with natural circulation. The cooling agent in contact with the
outdoor cooling system will be air with natural circulation.

15 Mar, 2011
Instrumentation
In order to ensure a good and safe operation of the transformers at least the following basic
supervision and protection devices shall be provided:
Buchholz protection relay, with normally closed and normally open contacts,
alarm and tripping and manual test button or alternative protection for sealed
tanks (overpressure, gas accumulation, sudden pressure),
Dial type thermometer with two adjustable maximum contracts (placed in such a
position that accurate reading is possible), incl. maximum pointer,
Oil level indicator gauge with maximum and minimum contact.
All contacts shall be suitable for operation between 24 V DC and 220 V AC.
All instrumentation shall be wired on the transformer to a common terminal box with degree of
protection of IP 55. All wiring must be provided in sealed steel pipes.
Auxiliary Equipment
The transformers shall be equipped with all auxiliary equipment which is necessary for a safe
operation and an easy maintenance (e. g. oil draining valve, sampling valve, oil filling plug,
pressure relief device, air dehydrating device for transformers with conservator, etc.).
maintenance issues.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
The transformer tanks, radiators and the other devices shall be spray galvanized. An
alternative painting system or an oil resistant coating of tanks and radiators will be accepted
as well.

15 Mar, 2011
All painting work shall be performed in accordance with the approved manufacturer
standards. The finish top layer color shall be in line with the approved color code schedule.

3.02 Marking
The following plates (may be combined also) shall be mounted on the low-voltage side of
each transformer tank at a height of about 1.5 m above ground:
A rating plate as specified in IEC 60076, including space for Owners serial
number, and alpha-numerical identification number,
A diagram plate with internal connections of windings,
A general plate showing the layout of the transformer covering the locations of
terminals, control devices, valves and all essential transportation details.
All the above plates shall be made from brass or stainless steel. Inscriptions shall be written
in English language.
3.03 Installation
The delivery, installation and commissioning of transformers shall include, but not be limited
to the following items:
Transport to location of installation (if necessary storage), and the complete

mounting,
Grounding and potential equalization for the transformers, including connection
with the next grounding bus bars,
Termination of all cables at the transformers,
Commissioning of the functioning transformers and adjustment of all protection
devices,
Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during
installation and commissioning phase.

15 Mar, 2011
The transformers shall be mounted after erection of the oil catch basins and the fire protection
walls. Sun shades and protection fences can be installed later, but before energizing of the
transformers.
For each oil type transformer a separate transformer box with oil catch basin, suitable for the
complete oil volume contained in the transformer, must be foreseen.
3.04 Workshop Tests
All transformers shall be tested completely and detailed in manufacturers workshop. All tests
the tests.
Tests in factory shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
standards.
These are according to IEC regulations mainly but not limited to the following:
Measurement of winding resistance,

Measurement of ratio,
Measuring of short circuit voltage, short circuit impedance and short check of
on-load circuit losses,
Measuring of no-load losses and no-load current,
Operation tests of the measuring equipment,
Test of transformer oil,
Test of auxiliary electrical devices.
3.05 Type Tests
Type tests and verifications according to VDE shall not be performed if the Contractor
supplies a copy of the certified test results.

15 Mar, 2011
3.06 Site Tests
Test runs,
Performance tests.
3.07 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the transformers and its
components.
The documentation of transformers shall include the following documents and drawings
(minimum requirements):

b) Layout drawings for all transformers and devices
c) Block diagrams
d) Wiring diagrams
e) Termination drawings
f) Cable lists
g) List of used devices with manufacturer
h) Spare parts list
i) Operation and maintenance manual
j) Reports of tests and commissioning with protocols.

15 Mar, 2011
with the Client.
3.08 Shipping
Two oil filter machine with filer earth filter.

One digital HV Insulation resistance Testing kit (Megger) with PI measuring
facility.
Two oil dielectric strength test kit.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16440
DISCONNECTS SWITCHES




Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS SWITCHES
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 Coordination
1.04 References
1.05 Quality Assurence
1.06 Submittals
1.08 Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Disconnect Switches
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Manufacturer
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
Furnish and install motor and circuit disconnects of ratings shown on drawings. Disconnects
shall be of the non-fusible and fused wire specified heavy-duty type safety switches having
electrical characteristics as hereinafter specified. All switches shall be "Underwriters
Laboratories Inc." (UL) listed, and meet "National Electrical Manufacturers Association"
(NEMA) specification KSI-1969.
1.02 COORDINATION
Determine the work to be performed by the building contractors and others throughout.
Provide the type and amount of materials and equipment necessary to place this work in
proper operation, completely installed, wired, tested, and ready for use.
A. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. Section 16110 Raceways.
C. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
E. Section 16452 Grounding and Bonding.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and

recommendations of the following standards.
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. (NEMA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
6. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
8. All Government Laws, Ordinances and Regulations.
Provide manufacturer's certificate or furnish such evidences as necessary to Client to assure

that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
1.06 SUBMITTALS

may be required. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to
time. Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer's published data,
installation and roughing-in data sheets and drawings indicating compliance with the
Contract documents.
B. Submittals shall be submitting within three (3) weeks after the contract start date.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect all materials and equipment from damage during handling and storage. Refer to
specification Section 16010 - "Basic Electrical Requirements" for complete work scope.
1.08 TESTING
A. Before shipment, the disconnect switches shall be tested to ensure proper operation
and conformance with manufacturer's published specifications. Notification of
completion of testing shall be sent to Client Representative.
B. The type test certificate for each type of disconnect switches may be accepted in lieu
of the actual tests on the disconnect switches being supplied on this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures and/or

NEMA Type 4 stainless steel watertight for outdoor use and wet locations.
Covers for general purpose enclosures shall be of the hinged type. Provisions for
pad-locking covers in the closed position, with defeatable interlocks to prevent the
cover from opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position shall be
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
provided. Enclosures shall be fabricated of code gauge steel, coated with a rust
inhibiting primer and finished in baked enamel, ANSI-611 gray. Factory installed
ground lugs shall be provided in each enclosure.
B. SWITCH INTERIORS AND MECHANISMS
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "off" position
when the cover is open. Removable arc suppresser shall be furnished where
necessary to permit easy access to line-side lugs. Lugs shall be of the
solderless type, UL listed for copper cables, and shall be front removable. all
heavy duty switches shall have live terminal shields.
2. Switch mechanism shall be of the quick-make, quick-break type, with pad

lockable operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. Switches
shall have dual cover interlocks to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch
when handle is on the "on" position, or closing of mechanism with cover in the
open position.
C. RATINGS
Provide horsepower-rated switches for use as motor circuit disconnects, of ratings as

shown on drawings. Switches shall be Model "H-600" as manufactured by
"Westinghouse Electric Corporation", with number of poles, voltage and rating as
shown on drawings. Factory mounted, metal nameplate with permanent stamping of
switch type, voltage, catalog number and horsepower rating shall be provided and
installed on front cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount all individually enclosed disconnects rigidly, and align properly on the building
structure 1 inch (25 mm) off the wall and 5 foot 10 inches(1.8 M) above finish floor.
Use steel supporting frames as necessary or as shown on drawings.
B. Provide and install a nameplate for disconnects. Nameplates shall be engraved in

both Arabic and English, indicating the name of equipment served with circuit or motor
number.
C. Nameplates shall be black-on-white, laminated phenolic, engraved in minimum 1/4

inch (6.5 mm) high lettering. Provide other or additional information on nameplates as
required. Refer to specification Section 16195 for complete requirement for
identification plates.
D. Install nameplates to disconnects with appropriate sheet metal screws. Glue-on types
and pop-rivet types are not acceptable. Submit samples where requested.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3.02 MANUFACTURER
The above named manufacturers are only for general conformance with the design
concept. Equal approved products are acceptable, providing all evidence required to
support this contention is in accordance with the above specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16452
EARTHING AND LIGHTING PROTECTION




Page 1 of 14
ELECTRICAL WORKS EARTHING AND LIGHTING PROTECTION
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Tagging
2.02 Earthing System
2.03 Installation of Earthing System
2.04 Lightning Protection
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Test
3.02 Documentation

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
This specification covers the technical requirements for design, construction, installation and
test of the earthing and lightning protection systems within the station areas for the
Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold mines.
The design, construction, installation, test and commissioning of earthing and lightning
protection systems shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least.
The latest revision of the publication referred to shall apply.
IEC 60364 Electrical installations of buildings
IEC 61024 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse
contract.
1.03 Submittals

for:

building lines.

installed.

15 Mar, 2011



instructions.

instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Tagging
For further requirements, reference is made to the specification Basic Electrical

Requirements.
2.02 Earthing System
General
The stations shall be equipped with an equipotentially meshed grounding network. All
exposed conductive parts or elements of the station systems will be connected to this
network. The earthing systems of the various stations are part of the protection systems for
electrical power supply, instrumentation, control and supervisory system.
The earthing system consists of the main grounding grid, the grounding rods, the building
foundation grounding and the equipment grounding.
For stations, which are to be extended, the existing earthing system shall be considered.
The layout of new earthing system shall match to the existing installations. The new and the
existing grounding network must be interconnected at two (2) locations, at least.

15 Mar, 2011
Soil Conditions
The grounding network system will be installed in different soil materials according to the
location of the stations.
Before design and installation of the grounding network the actual soil conditions in the station
areas must be determined by adequate soil resistance measurements.
Design Requirements
The earth resistance of the overall interconnected station grounding network shall not exceed
1 . For block valve stations without high and medium installations a maximum earth
resistance of 2 will be accepted.
For the UPS, the SCADA and telecommunication systems with their equipment a separate
grounding network with sufficient cross-section to avoid interference shall be installed. This
grounding network shall be connected to the common station grounding network on one (1)
separable and indicated connection point, within the electrical building or equipment container
(for line valve stations), respectively.
The actual soil conditions in the stations areas must be determined by soil resistance
measurements. The required conductor spacing, the total length of the grounding grid and the
required grounding material cross-section shall be calculated under consideration of the
maximum earth fault current, to maintain touch and step voltages within reasonable limits.
The impedance of the fault current path and protective devices shall be chosen that the
faulted circuit will be disconnected from the supply within the required time. A respective
grounding calculation with report shall be performed for each station and is to be submitted to
the Client for approval.
Multiple connections of grounding conductors shall only be carried out above ground. For
these connections the respective grounding bars are to be installed.
Extensions of single grounding conductors can be permitted below ground under use of
compression connectors or welding connections, with repair painting and coating of the
connection point.
All connections of conductors on equipment shall be performed with pressure type lugs or
connectors and threaded bolts, screws, spring-washers and washers.
Special care must be taken to avoid the arising of a chemical element.
Connections between bare copper and iron parts must be protected in a special manner and
shall only be executed on above-ground connection points (grounding bars) or inside of pits.

15 Mar, 2011
Earthing Material
The material and minimum dimension shall be selected in conformity with the relevant
standards. The grounding network shall consist of copper rope, galvanized strip iron,
grounding and potential equalization bars, grounding rods, copper cable and fastening /
connection parts.
For the different application the following materials with the minimum measures shall be
provided:
Stranded copper rope, lead sheathed Cu/Pb,

Main grounding grid, directly buried
minimum cross section 70 mm
Grounding rods Hot dip galvanized steel, 25 mm, minimum
length 3 m
Grounding bars
Copper, 50 x 5 mm, minimum length 300 mm
Potential equalization bars, within Brass, tinned, 10 x 10 mm, minimum length

buildings 200 mm, with cover
Foundation grounding Strip iron, St/tZn 30 x 3.5 mm
Grounding ring within buildings, on Stranded copper rope, lead sheathed Cu/Pb
the wall, in tubes with minimum cross section of 70 mm or
grounding/potential equalization bars
connected with PVC insulated copper cables
with minimum cross section of 70 mm
Connection between inner and outer PVC insulated copper cable, minimum cross
grounding ring of buildings section 70 mm
Connecting lugs on foundation PVC insulated copper cable, minimum cross
grounding to outside concrete section 70 mm
Equipment connections PVC insulated copper cable,70, 50, 35 or 16
mm, depending on equipment
2.03 Installation of Earthing System
Main Grounding Grid

The ropes for main grounding grid shall be laid at least 50 cm below final grade in natural soil.
Common laying of grounding and cable in one cable trench is permitted, in this case the
ropes have to be placed beside the cable route and surrounded with compacted material prior
to sand bedding necessary for the cable laying.

15 Mar, 2011
In areas of rocky ground the grounding conductor must be laid in a compacted ground
material bed, if necessary the conductor can be washed in by using of water and mud.
Grounding rods shall be installed in sufficient number to reduce the effective resistant to earth
(if necessary). The grounding rods shall be driven into ground and are to be provided with a
pit. The connection to the main grounding grid shall be performed inside the pit by
compression connectors or screwed connection terminals.
Foundation Grounding
For foundation grounding a closed loop of strip iron shall be laid in the concrete of foundations
for the outer building walls. Larger buildings (e.g. pump houses, electrical buildings, etc.) are
to be equipped with additional cross-connections between the loop, to form a mesh.
The reinforcement must be interconnected at suitable points by welding and is to be

connected at least every 10 m to the foundation grounding loop or cross-connections
respectively. Rooms or buildings with switchgears and the pump houses shall be provided
with a welded steel wire fabric, laid inside the screed and interconnected with the foundation
grounding.
For connection to inside and outside the buildings the respective connecting lugs shall be
installed.
Outdoor Connecting Lugs
The outdoor connecting lugs on the foundation grounding are intended as surface
connections for the conductor of the lightning protection system and the main grounding grid.
The following distances shall be observed:
buildings containing control system approx. 10 m

other buildings and shafts approx. 20 m
In each case, buildings or shafts shall be equipped with two connection lugs, at least.
The connecting lugs on the foundation grounding shall be embedded in concrete and their
outlets should be located above the ground surface. The connecting lugs are to be terminated
on grounding bars.
Indoor Connecting Lugs
The indoor connecting lugs on foundation grounding are intended for the indoor potential
equalization system and indoor screening connections.
All buildings and rooms containing power supply/distribution facilities and control systems,
such as high-voltage substations medium-voltage rooms, low-voltage room, rooms with sub-
distribution boards, control rooms etc. and rooms, buildings shafts with process installations
shall be provided with indoor connecting lugs.

15 Mar, 2011
The quantity of connecting lugs depends on size of structure and the equipment placed in the
respective building or room.
In the case of several connections per building or room, potential equalization bars shall be
installed. These bars must be permanently accessible for inspection purposes.
Buildings and Supports, Steel Structures
All foundations and shafts shall be equipped with foundation grounding. Small foundations for
lighting poles, grounding bars or electrical equipment (switches, socket outlets etc.) and small
concrete supports do not need foundation grounding.
In a distance of approximately 1 m around all buildings, foundations for steel structures and
shafts a grounding conductor (lead sheathed copper) shall be laid in a loop of at least 0.5 m
depth. The connection between the loops and the foundation grounding of these buildings,
steel structures and shafts shall be performed on grounding bars. These bars shall be
installed every 10 or 20 m respectively at the outlet-points of foundation grounding connection
lugs in a height of min. 0.35 m above ground level. The internal loops or internal potential
equalization bars shall be connected with the outside grounding bars at suitable points by
means of additionally cables.
Steel structures have to be welded together in a manner such that a good conductivity of
these connections is ensured. Each steel structure column is to be connected to the
grounding system.
For grounding connection of equipment inside of buildings the PVC insulated copper
conductor shall be laid in cable ducts or conduits, on cable trays, direct wall mounted with
clamps depending on the different equipment and locations.
Transformers
Power transformers have to be connected with their steel tank, transport rails and foundation
steel structures to the corresponding grounding network.
The connection of the neutral or star-point of the transformers to the grounding network
depends on the general system grounding of the various voltage levels.
The neutral/star-point connection must be placed at an identified and easy accessible place,
separate for each transformer.
Switchgears, Sub-Distribution Boards
If several devices form part of a larger unit (such as switchgears, sub-distribution boards,
control cabinets, control boards, etc.), this unit shall be provided with one earthing screw or
plate with which the earthing screws or plates of each individual device shall have solid
contact.

15 Mar, 2011
When control boards, control desks, switchgears, sub-distribution boards consist of several
individual cabinets, each cabinet shall be connected to a common earthing bar unless all
panels are solidly welded together or other approved means are applied ensuring a solid
connection. If, in this case, units or larger conductive extensions are formed, provisions for
earthing shall be available at least at both ends.
Power Consumers
All motors, generators, valve actuators, ventilators and other power consumers shall be
connected to the grounding network with the grounding conductor of their feeding power
cable. In addition the power consumer casings and/or their steel base frames shall be
connected to the grounding network by separate copper cable.
Cables and Cable Jointing Boxes
In each cable jointing box the earthing conductor of the two cables has to be connected.
When using metal sleeves, the earthing conductor shall be connected to the sleeve casing,
too.
Medium voltage cables have to be connected with their screens or shields to the earthing
terminal in the equipment terminal box and in the switchgear.
The metal screens or shields of the power, control and instrument cables have to be
connected with the ground conductor. For instrument circuits the grounding conductor and
screen shall be connected on one side only, preferably in the instrument cabinet or
marshalling rack. Inside of junction boxes the screens and shields are to be interconnected
and connected with the earthing system.
Towers
The steel structure of towers has to be welded or screwed together in a manner such that the
good conductivity of these connections is ensured. Each tower must be connected at two
points to the station grounding network. For remote towers a suitable earthing system must
be installed for connection of these towers and lightning protection of the installed equipment.
Pipes
Each metallic pipe shall be connected with the grounding direct behind of its entry in a
building or shaft. The grounding of pipes inside of shafts for a cathodically protected pipeline
must be performed via special AC-voltage limitation devices (e.g. polarization cell
replacements) to avoid problems for the cathodic protection system.
Pipes installed on supports and the respective supports do not need any additional
connection to the grounding system.

15 Mar, 2011
Fence, Lighting Poles
The station fence shall be connected on four locations to the grounding network.
Each lighting pole and mast shall be connected to the station earthing system.
For termination with the buried part of grounding grid a multiple underground connection
allowed, which is to be provided following the procedure for grounding conductor extensions.
Passage Earth to Air
At passages from ground to air all conductors shall be protected with rigid non metallic, heavy
duty conduits approx. 30 cm below and 30 cm above ground level.
The conduits have to be sealed with durable sealing compound and must be fixed on
foundations, structures, etc.
Surge Arrestors
For all equipment, which might be affected by lightning shocks, the necessary protection
measures shall be provided. Surge arrestors shall be provided in order to protect the sensitive
equipment and instruments (this applies in particular to electrical equipment, field instrument
circuits, station and unit control system, telephone system and radio equipment).
The surge arrestors shall be connected to the station earthing system.
2.04 Lightning Protection
General
All buildings, towers and other high structures of the stations must be protected against
lightning and electrostatic discharges by means of a lightning protection system.
The lightning system consists of collector rods (air terminals), collector lines and down
conductors from hot dip galvanized round iron (St/tZn 10 mm) and the necessary fixing,
connection and termination elements.
The lightning protection systems of the several buildings and structures are to be connected
with the earthing system via the grounding bars of these buildings or structures.
Shafts shall not be equipped with separate lightning protection. All outer metallic parts will be
connected either with the internal potential equalization bars or the grounding bars at outside.
The layout and design of lightning protection systems for building extensions or new buildings
and structures provided within existing station areas shall match the existing design.

15 Mar, 2011
All connections between the different parts of lightning protection systems and the
connections to the earthing system must be performed in a manner such that the arising of
chemical elements will be avoided.
Collectors
Collectors shall be determined in accordance with the lightning ball method.
Collectors may comprise a combination of the following components:
Collector lines,
Collector rods.
Natural Components of Collectors
Metal cladding, metal roof structures, metal components of roof structures, gutters and
railings may be considered as natural components of collectors.
The requirements of the standards, such as the following, have to be considered:
parts must be permanently conductively connected,

minimum thickness of the metal involved,
Cross-sections of the parts.
Installations with metal casings need not to be fitted with collectors taking into consideration
the above-mentioned minimum requirements.
Protective coatings or insulation between metal parts shall be electrically bridged.
Mesh-Type Collectors
Buildings shall be provided with mesh-type collector lines. The collectors have to be
configured in a way such that no point of the roof is at a distance of more than 5 m from a
collector.
The maximum permitted mesh size is as follows:
buildings with telecommunication or control rooms 10 x 10 m

Other buildings 10 x 20 m
Protruding roof superstructures, such as ladders, chimney stacks, pipes, antenna mounting
brackets, etc. and other metallic parts of buildings which are located near the roof (e.g.
louvers of ventilation openings) must be directly connected to the collector lines.

15 Mar, 2011
Collector Rods
Collector rods shall be used for roof superstructures featuring mechanically or electrically
operated equipment, such as ventilators and non-conductive parts projecting from the mesh
plane by 0.3 m. The angle of protection and a certain minimum distance have to be observed.
Outdoor electrical facilities for HVAC or other purposes not located in the protective area of
earthed structures, installations or buildings, including exposed electrical equipment shall be
protected by collectors.
Buildings with sheet metal roofs where the thickness of the sheet is smaller as the required
value, the collector mesh must be equipped with collector rods of sufficient quantity and
length to avoid lightning strokes in the sheet metal.
Down Conductors
Down conductors shall be selected in a manner such that there are several parallel current
paths between the collector and the earthing system. The length of each down conductor is to
be kept as short as possible.
Steel structures and steel columns of buildings may be used as down conductor, if the
minimum sizes according to the standards are guaranteed. In each case the connections with
the earthing system and collectors respectively must be visible and removable.
Starting from the corners of the structure involved, conductors should be distributed around
the exterior as evenly as possible. They must be configured in such a way as to constitute the
direct continuation of the collector. The minimum distance between conductors and doors,
windows and other apertures must be 0.5 m.
If not already connected with the collectors or with the internal potential equalization, larger
metal parts mounted in/on the building outer walls (e.g. frames of doors, ventilation louvers)
shall be terminated on the down conductors.
The number of down conductors and the minimum distance between the conductors is given
as follows:
a) Buildings containing telecommunication and control systems

minimum number of conductors: 4
maximum distance between conductors: 10 m
b) Other buildings
minimum number of conductors: 2
maximum distance between conductors: 20 m
All down conductors which are connected to the earthing system must be provided with an
accessible isolating point for measuring purposes. For termination the grounding bars of
grounding loops shall be used, preferably.

15 Mar, 2011
No conductors are required for outdoor metal structures of adequate size.
Inadmissibly Short Distances

Inadmissibly short distances between the lightning protection system and metal installations
or electrical equipment shall be prevented. In the event of potential hazard due to flash-over
or disruptive discharge caused by lightning, appropriate measures shall be taken.
Admissible distances between lightning protection systems and metal installations, electrical
wiring and equipment shall be determined in compliance with the standards. This also applies
to the use of special roof-mounted collectors.
2.05 Special Requiremets
maintenance issues.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Test
After erection of the earthing and lightning protection system all installations shall be tested in
accordance with applicable regulations.
measures against corrosion protection and arising of chemical elements,

check of all connections,
measurements of earthing system resistance,
measurements of lightning protection system conductivity,
check of mechanical details,
compliance with specifications.
The measuring results and the locations of the measuring points have to be indicated in
respective drawings as a basis for future measurements.
3.02 Documentation
Complete documentation shall be provided for the design, construction, testing, maintenance
and repair of the earthing and lightning protection systems and their components.
The documentation shall be in English language.
The final documentation of earthing and lightning protection system shall at least include the
following documents and drawings (minimum requirements):

15 Mar, 2011
a) Technical data sheets,

b) Layout drawings,
c) Circuit diagrams,
d) Construction drawings,
e) Calculation of earthing system,
f) List of used devices with manufacturer,
g) Spare parts list,
h) Operation and maintenance manuals,
i) Reports of tests with protocols.
The documentation has to be prepared in accordance with the relevant ISO standards.
of the signed protocols in electronic form, also. The type of the electronic files and the number
of copies shall be agreed with the Client.
3.03 Spare part and Special Tools
One Earth resistance measurement device
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16461
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER




Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 References
1.04 Submittals
1.06 Qualification
1.07 Regulatory Requirments
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Dry Type General Purpose Transformer
2.02 Source Quality Control
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
3.02 Installation
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Dry type general purpose transformer.
A. Section 16195 Electrical Identification.
B. Section 16452 Grounding and Bonding
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ST 1 Specialty Transformer
B. NEMA ST 20 Dry Type Transformer for General Applications.
C. NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
D. ANSI/IEEE C57.12 General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power

Transformers.
E. ANSI/IEEE C57.96 Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power

transformers.
F. ASTM D635 ASTM Standard Test Method.
G. NECA Standard of Installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and
accessories, unit weight, volltage, kVA, impedance ratings and characteristics, tap
configurations, insulation, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
B. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiencies and sound levels at 25, 50, 75 and 100
percent rated loads.
C. Manufacturers Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instruction for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
D. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify that Products are designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with all the latest applicable ANSI, NEMA and IEEE Standards.
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of installation.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: A approved Manufacturer specializing in manufacturing Products specified

in this Section with a minimum of three years documented experience.
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Conform to requirements of ANSI/IEEE C57.12 and C57.96.
C. Conform to NEMA ST20.
A. Store, protects, and handles products to site under provision of Section 16010.
B. Deliver transformers individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Accept transformer on site. Inspect for damage.

D. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DRY TYPE GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER
A. Manufacturers: Refer to Approved Manufacturers List.
B. Description: Transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance

with NEMA ST 20, and shall be factory-assembled, air cooled dry type transformer, factor
K=13, with ratings and voltages as indicated on Contract Drawings.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
C. Transformer shall be designed for continuous operation rated at 75 KVA, for 24 hours
per day, 365 days per year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI
C57.96.
D. Core and Coil Assemblies.
Transformer core shall be constructed with high grade, non-aging, grain-oriented silicon
steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses.
Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The
transformer core volumes shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the
highest tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed.
Coils shall be wound of electrical grade copper with continuous wound construction.
E. Winding Taps
Transformers 30 KVA: NEMA ST 20.
F. Sound Levels: Transformer Sound Level shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA
levels for self-cooled ratings measured in accordance with NEMA ST 20.
Sound Levels in Decibles: 50 db
G. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

H. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
I. 30 KVA transformer mounting; Floor Mounting only.
J. Enclosures
The enclosure shall be made of heavy gauge steel and shall be finished utilizing a
continuous process of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic
deposition of a thermosetting polyester powder coating and subsequent baking. The
coating color shall be ANSI 61 and shall be UL recognized for outdoor use.
K. Manufacturers Nameplate: Include transformer ratings, connection data and overload

capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise.
L. Lamacoid nameplate shall be in accordance with Section 16195.
M. Provide oversize lugs for the termination of cable sizes as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide production testing of each unit in accordance with NEMA ST 20. The following
shall be made on all transformers:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
1. Ratio test at the rated voltage at all tap connections.
2. Polarity and phase-relation tests on each rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential test.
5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on each rated voltage

connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are suitable for installing transformer supports.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set transformer plumb and level.
C. Mount transformers on vibration-absorbing pads suitable for isolating transformer

noise from the building structure.
D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16170.
A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer.
B. Measure Primary and Secondary voltage and make appropriate tap adjustments.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS




Page 1 of 11
ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
1.04 Extra Materials
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Panelboards, General Requirements
2.03 Load Centers
2.04 Lighting and Applience Branch ircuit Panelboards
2.05 Distribution Panelboards
2.06 Accessory Components and Features
2.07 Identifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Indentifiation
3.03 Grounding
3.04 Connections
3.06 Cleaning
3.07 Commissioning
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes lighting and power circuit breaker type panelboards and
associated auxiliary equipment rated 600V or less.
A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Conform to the codes and standards listed, but not
limited to:
1. Provide products that are listed and labeled by UL, NEMA, or other, nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
2. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation which shall

comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
3. NEMA Standard: Comply with NEMA PB1, Panelboards.
4. UL Standards: Comply with UL 61, Panelboards, and UL 50, Cabinets and

Boxes.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component
specified.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturers of panelboards including dimensioned

plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major
features, and voltage rating. Include the following:
a. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.
b. Bus configuration and current ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

protective devices and auxiliary components.
e. Spare Fuse Cabinets: Show materials, dimensions, and features

including storage provisions for fuse cartons.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Wiring diagrams detailing schematic diagram including control wiring, and

differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the

Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements
specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with
project names, addresses, and names of Architect and Owner plus basic
organization qualifications data.
5. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.
6. Panel schedules for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after

load balancing.
7. Maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating and

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Requirements." Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Keys: Furnish six spares of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.
B. Touch-up Paint for surface-mounted panelboards: One half-pint container.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

the following:

following:
1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.

2. American Circuit Breaker Corp.
3. Asco Electrical Products Co., Inc.
4. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment.
5. Eaton Corp.
6. General Electric Co.
7. GTE Sylvania Lighting.
8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
9. Square D Co.
10. Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
11. Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.02 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Over current Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as
indicated. Comply with Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices," with
OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be
used. Multi pole breakers shall have common trip.
B. Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicated. NEMA Type 1

enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are indicated.
1. NEMA 3R: Raintight.
2. NEMA 3S: Raintight and dust tight.
3. NEMA 4X: Corrosion-resistant fiberglass enclosure, watertight, dust tight, and

resistant to oil and coolant seepage.
4. NEMA 7: Hazardous locations: Div. 1 Group C&D.
5. NEMA 12: Dust tight, drip proof, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage.
C. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. Front for
surface-mounted panels shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panels
shall overlap box except as otherwise specified.
D. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door.
E. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.
F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors. Bonded to box.
H. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards
having main service disconnect.
I. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and
necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future
installation of devices.
J. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated.
1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment

ground conductors; insulated from box.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
3. Split Bus: Vertical bus of indicated panels divided into two vertical sections
with connections as indicated.
4. Skirt For Surface-Mounted Panels: Same gage and finish as panel front with
flanges for attachment to panel, wall, and floor.
5. Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and

connections as indicated. Conform to Division 16 Section "Motor Controller,"
except omit overload protection.
6. Control Power Source: Control power transformer of capacity indicated, for

contactor shunt trip or other devices. Mount in cabinet of panel indicated.
Protect primary with current- limiting OCPD as indicated. Provide fused
protection of control circuits.
7. Extra Gutter Space: Dimensions and arrangement as indicated.
8. Gutter Barrier: Arranged to isolate section of gutter as indicated.
9. Auxiliary Gutter: Conform to UL 870, "Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and

Associated Fittings."
10. Column-Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as wireway

to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
11. Subfeed: OCPD or lug provision as indicated.
K. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.
L. Surge Arresters: IEEE C62.11, "Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC
Power Circuits," or IEEE C62.1, "Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power
Circuits."
2.03 LOAD CENTERS
A. Provide load-center-type panelboards only where specifically indicated.
B. General: Conform to above article "Panelboards, General Requirements" except as

follows:
1. OCPDs: Plug-in full module (nominal 1-inch width) circuit breaker.
2. Circuit Breakers for Switching Lights at Panelboards: Indicated type SWD.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Circuit Breakers for Equipment Marked HCAR Type: Indicated HCAR type.
4. Interiors: Provide physical means to prevent installation of more OCPDs than

the quantity for which the enclosure was listed.
5. Main, Neutral, and Ground Lugs and Buses: Have mechanical connectors for
conductors.
2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent

units.
B. Double-Width Panels: Where more than 42 poles are indicated or where otherwise
indicated, provide two panelboards under single front.
C. Doors: In panel front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler
lock, all keyed alike.
2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: In panel front, omit single panelboard door in cabinet front for fusible switch
panelboards except as indicated. Secure with vault-type with tumbler lock, all keyed
alike.
B. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Where OCPDs are indicated to be circuit breakers, use bolt-
on breakers except circuit breakers 225-ampere frame size and greater may be plug-
in type where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for
removal.
C. Motor Starter Branches: Conform to Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" and

provide units equipped for panelboard mounting. Include the following accessories
and pilot devices as indicated:
1. Individual control power transformers.
2. Fuses for control power transformers.
3. Pilot lights.
4. Extra interlock contacts.
5. Pushbuttons.
6. Selector switches.
D. Motor Starter Disconnects: Include overcurrent protection as indicated. Mount

integral with or, in same panelboard, adjacent to motor starter. Mechanically interlock
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
starter door with disconnect device. Provide auxiliary contacts on disconnect to de-
energize control connections to starter.
2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent
protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of functions of solid-state trip devices
without removal from panelboard.
C. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Identified, compartmented, lockable steel box or cabinet with
compartments suitable for surface mounting on wall.
D. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboards interior including

OCPDs and other components.
2.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labeling materials.
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic or metal nameplate for each

panelboard mounted with epoxy or industrial cement or industrial adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1,
"General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturers' written installation
instructions.
B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in
accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground
Fault Circuit Interrupters."
C. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6'-2" above finished floor, except as indicated.
D. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly
flush with wall finish.
E. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance
panel loads. Obtain approval before installing.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1- inch empty conduits
from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in
future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other
than slabs on grade.
H. Auxiliary Gutter: Install where a panel is tapped to a riser at an intermediate location.
I. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with
wire ties after completion of load balancing.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs in

accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Connections: Make equipment-grounding connections for panelboards as indicated.

B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL
486B.
A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an

independent electrical testing organization in to perform tests on low-voltage power
panelboards and accessories.
B. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following

preparations for independent tests:
1. Make insulation resistance tests of panelboard buses, components, and

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.
2. Make continuity tests of circuits.
3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full updating

on final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ
from those indicated in original Contract Documents.
C. Quality Control Program: Conform to the following:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
D. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare panelboard for satisfactory
operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these
specifications.
1. Schedule tests with at least one week in advance notification.
2. Reports by Testing Organization: Report written reports of tests and

observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory
test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.
3. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a

label to tested components indicating results of tests and inspections,
responsible organization and person, and date.
4. Protective Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings
to be appropriate for final system configuration and parameters. Where
discrepancies are found, recommend final protective device ratings and
settings. Use accepted ratings or settings to make the final system
adjustments.
E. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance
with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.
2. Exercise and perform of operational tests of all mechanical components and

other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of

components.
4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.

Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for overcurrent
protective devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective
Devices."
F. Electrical tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with

manufacturer's instruction:
1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that

disconnected from solid-state devices. Insulation resistance less than 100
megohms is not acceptable.
2. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Test main and subfeed overcurrent protective devices in accordance with

Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices."
G. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide
retesting of panelboards by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that the
total assembly meets specified requirements.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of
finish to match original finish.
3.07 COMMISSIONING
A. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after
Final Acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as
follows:
1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by

the Company Representative.
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Company
Representative to avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as FAX
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving
equipment.
3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load
readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference between phase loads exceeding 20 percent at any one

panelboard is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this
minimum requirement.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES




Page 1 of 14
ELECTRICAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer
2.02 Overcurrent Protection Devices
2.03 Fuseable Switches
2.04 Fused Power Circuit Devices
2.05 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.06 Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Identification
3.03 Control Wiring Installation
3.04 Connections
3.05 Grounding
3.07 Cleaning
3.08 Demonstration
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600V and below and
switching devices commonly used with them.
B. Panelboards and Motor Controls: Application, installation, and other related
requirements for overcurrent protective device installations in distribution equipment
are specified in other Division 16 sections.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA
70 "National Electrical Code."
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National
Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from a single manufacturer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data for fuses, fusible switches, circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories
specified in this Section, including descriptive data and time-current curves for all
protective devices and let- through current curves for those with current limiting
characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables and related data.
A. Maintenance Stock Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish spare fuses,
amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one set of 3 of each
kind.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:

following:
1. Cartridge Fuses:
Brush Fuses Inc.

Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
Ferraz Corp.
Gould Inc.
Littelfuse Inc.
2. Fusible Switches:
Allen-Bradley Co.
Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.
Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment.
Eaton Corp.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
Westinghouse Electric Co.
3. Fused Power Circuit Devices:

General Electric Co. Kinney Electrical Mfg. Co.
Pringle Electrical Mfg. Co.
Square D Co.
4. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
American Circuit Breaker Corp.

ABB Power Distribution, Inc.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Eaton Corp.

Heinemann Electric Co.
Square D Co.
Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
5. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:
American Circuit Breaker Corp.

Square D Co.
6. Molded-Case Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:

Square D Co.
7. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices:

Square D Co.
8. Integrally Fused Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

9. Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers:

Square D Co. Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL
A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards,

switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and
mounted single units.
B. Enclosures: NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."
2.03 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed

Switches," quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty units.
B. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the
switch.
C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let-through current permitted by its fuse when
subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
D. Operation: By means of external handle.
E Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position.
F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type.
G. Padlocking Provisions: For 2 padlocks, whether open or closed.
H. Enclosure for Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting where indicated.
I. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated.
J. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise

indicated or required to suit environment where located.
2.04 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES
A. General: UL 977, "Fused Power Circuit Devices," with either bolted- pressure-type or
high-pressure contact-type switch.
B. Operation:
1. Manually opened and closed.

2. Manually closed, electrically tripped.
3. Electrically closed and tripped.
C. Operation: As indicated.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
D. Ground Fault Protection: Integral, self-powered type with mechanical ground fault
indicator, test function, adjustable pickup current and delay time with inverse and
constant time characteristics, internal memory arranged to integrate intermittent arcing
ground faults, and ground fault current sensor located as indicated.
E. Open Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.
F. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Suitable for individual mounting.
G. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as indicated or

except as required to suit environment where located.
H. Minimum Fault Current Rating:
1. 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

4. As indicated.
2.05 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures,"
and NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers."
B. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be
plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for
removal.
C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and

breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by
positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.
D. Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and a short-circuit
interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is
indicated.
E. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay

and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.
F. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low- trip-setting current

values.
G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in

switchboard or panelboards where indicated.
H. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual

mounting where indicated.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
I. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise

indicated or required to suit environment where located.
J. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 "Ground
Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in
addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. Provide features as follows:
1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear
identification of ground fault trip function.
2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a

class A, type 1 device.
3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes.
4. Trip setting for ground fault as indicated.
K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared-

seconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere-squared-seconds of
one-half-cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The circuit breaker
shall use no fusible devices in its operation. The current-limiting characteristic shall be
in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other
features as indicated.
L. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared-

seconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere-squared-seconds of
one-half-cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The current-limiting
characteristic shall be achieved through the use of replaceable current-limiting fuses
internally mounted within the circuit- breaker case. The opening of any one fuse shall
trip all poles of the circuit breaker. For each trip rating the time-current characteristic
of the fuses shall be coordinated with that of the normal inverse-time and
instantaneous-trip devices of the circuit breaker so current- limiting fuse melting does
not occur for faults within the interrupting rating of the basic breaker.
M. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with
solid-state trip devices having the following features:
1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes

between minus 20 deg C and plus 55 deg C.
2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by

operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element
without removing breaker from mounting, or by a combination of the two
methods.
3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide

for indicated units.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.06 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: UL 489, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures,"

and NEMA AB 1, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers."
B. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time- current ratings, and voltage

and frequency ratings as indicated.
C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating

mechanism with the following features:
1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
2. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged.
3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with provision for optional

manual charging.
4. Operation Counter: Include except as otherwise indicated.
D. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state over current trip device system that includes
one integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, a release
mechanism, and the following features:
1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous- trip

functions, which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from

minus 20 deg C to plus 55 deg C.
3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by

changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors.
5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum,"

"intermediate," and "maximum."
6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long-time- and short-time- trip functions.
7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
8. Ground fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three
trip-time-delay bands. Adjustable current pickup.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall

indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power
source shall maintain indication for 60 hours, minimum.
E. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position
is indicated, provide a spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches
required for normal breaker operation. The spare auxiliary switch shall consist of two
Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts), wired to a terminal block in the breaker
housing.
F. Draw out Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking

mechanism that properly positions the power circuit breaker and holds it rigidly in
connected, test, and fully disconnected positions and includes the following features:
1. Interlock arrangement, preventing movement of the circuit breaker to or from

the connected position when it is in the closed position and closure of the
circuit breaker unless it is in the connected, test, or disconnected position.
2. Construction, permitting racking an open circuit breaker to or from the

connected, test, and disconnected positions with the associated compartment
door closed or equivalent dead-front barrier protection, and manual withdrawal
to a position for removal from the structure with the door open.
3. Primary disconnecting devices disengaged and secondary disconnecting

devices engaged when breaker is in test position.
4. Primary and secondary devices disengaged when circuit breaker is in the

disconnected position.
5. Ground contact engaged when the circuit-breaker element is in the connected

and test positions.
G. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Include the following:
1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each breaker

to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of the draw out mechanism.
2. Operating Handle: Provide one for each manually operated breaker.
3. Electric Close Button: Provide one for each electrically operated breaker.
4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for "Breaker Open" and "Breaker Closed," for main
and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with

manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. OCPDs in distribution equipment shall be factory installed.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
Identify components in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.03 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between OCPDs and control/indication devices as specified in Division

16 Section "Wires and Cables" for hard wired connections.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten field-
connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as

indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an

independent electrical testing organization to perform tests and observations on
OCPDs.
B. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by Testing Organization on tests and

observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test
results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made.
C. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and
person.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
D. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one
week's advance notification.
E. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following

preparations for independent tests:
1. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting

supply, feeder, and control circuits.
2. Make continuity tests of circuits.
3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on

final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ
from those indicated in original Contract Documents.
4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to

test personnel.
F. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.
G. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and

settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where
discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device
ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make the final system
adjustments.
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate
compliance with current single line diagram.
2. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and

other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
3. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque

wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
4. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.
5. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs.
H. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions:
1. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less

than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2. Contact resistance test or measurement of milli volt drop across contacts of

draw out circuit breakers and fused power circuit devices at rated current.
Compare contact resistance or milli volt drop values of adjacent poles and of
similar breakers. Deviations of more than 50 percent are not acceptable.
3. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices and insulated-case

and molded-case circuit breakers over 600- ampere frame size at 1000 V d.c.
for one minute from pole to pole and from each pole to ground with breaker
closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance less
than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
4. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of trip units

of insulated-case circuit breakers and molded-case breakers over 600-ampere
frame size. Trip characteristics not falling within manufacturer's published time-
current characteristic tolerance bands when adjusted to approved parameters
are not acceptable. Perform the following tests:
a. Determine minimum pickup current acceptable per manufacturer's

instructions.
b. Determine long-time delay at 300 percent pickup current.
c. Determine short-time-pickup current and corresponding delay time.
d. Determine ground-fault current pickup and corresponding delay time.
e. Determine instantaneous pickup current value.
5. Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers.
6. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices.
7. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or under voltage

relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices.
8. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor,

mechanism, and limit switches.
9. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
10. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and
sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on
locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters.
11. Circuit breakers of all types & voltage levels shall be field trip-tested at site.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting
of OCPDs by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that specified
requirements are met.
3.07 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service

representatives to demonstrate OCPDs and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
B. Conduct a minimum of one half day of training in operation and maintenance as

specified under "Instructions to Owner Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of
these specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment
operation and maintenance procedures.
C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16480
MOTOR STARTER EQUIPMENT




Page 1 of 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS MOTOR STARTER EQUIPMENT
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.02 Standards
1.03 Submittals
1.05 Technical Data
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 Tagging
2.04 Wiring
2.06 General
2.07 Number of Stars
2.08 Starting Procedure and Limitation
2.09 Safety Interlocking Devices
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Painting
3.02 Installation
3.03 Workshop Test
3.04 Site Test
3.05 Documentation
3.06 Shipping

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
installation, test and commissioning of motor starter equipment for indoor application at the
Pumping Stations for the Transportation of Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold
mines.
1.02 Standards
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of motor starter
equipment shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least.
The latest revision of the publication referred to shall apply.
accessories
IEC 60056 High voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60129 Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches
IEC 60044 Current transformers
IEC 60044 Voltage transformers
IEC 60265 High-voltage switches
IEC 60282 High-voltage fuses
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP-Code)
IEC 60076 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 60076 Application guide for power transformers
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers
IEC 60664 Insulation co-ordination for equipment within low voltage systems

15 Mar, 2011
IEC 60694 Common clauses for high-voltage MCC and control gear
standards
IEC 60076 Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse testing of power
transformers and reactors
IEC 60076 Dry-type transformers
IEC 60905 Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
IEC 62271 High-voltage MCC and control gear
contract.
1.03 Submittals

for:

building lines.

installed.



15 Mar, 2011

instructions.

instructions.
The motor starter equipment shall be designed and constructed for the intended purpose of
main motor start-up under the climatic and environmental conditions as described in the
specification Basic Electrical Requirements.
The motor starter equipment shall be installed in rooms of the electrical buildings.
The rooms will be equipped with air conditioning.
1.05 Technical Data
The technical data of the motor starter equipment are defined in the data sheets.
The Contractor has to guarantee the fulfilment of these requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Standard industrial high performance systems and components of suppliers standard lists
shall be used as far as possible. Components and equipment same kind and type shall be
selected for equivalent functions. The interchangeability must be guaranteed.
2.02 Tagging
screws.


15 Mar, 2011
2.03 Wiring
The wires shall be selected according to load, insulation level, and function and operating
requirements. The wires shall be adequately rated and equipped with fuses / circuit breakers
of adequate size.
The wiring colors and the minimum cross sections shall be according to specification Basic
Electrical Requirements. The wiring shall be carried out solid and safe against damages.
Wires shall be bundled and fixed. The wiring shall be laid inside of wiring channels,
preferably. If wiring channels will be used, a spare of 20 % shall be foreseen.
All circuits and auxiliary contacts including not used contacts for disconnecting devices and
relays shall be terminated on terminal strips. Terminal strips shall have 10 % spare terminals.
If wires with different potential will be terminated on one terminal strip the respective terminals
shall be separated by means of isolating plates. The termination of multiple stranded wires
has to be carried out by means of multiple core cable ends.
connection point.
maintenance issues.
2.05 General
The motor starter equipment shall start-up centrifugal pipeline pumps, which will be driven by
medium voltage asynchronous squirrel cage motors.
The motor starter equipment per motor consists of the following main parts:
MCC panel,
Auto-transformer,
Control devices.
For each applicable pump motor unit a separate starter shall be provided. All parts of
the motor starter equipment for one motor shall be assembled to a common unit,
exchangeable to each other for the same motor size.

15 Mar, 2011
2.06 Number of Starts
The motors are designed to allow 4 starts successively from cold (max. ambient temperature)
or 3 starts successfully from hot service temperature without tripping of any protection device.
The starting time sequence is as follows:
(1) (2) immediately,

(3) After 20 min,
(4) After further 20 min.
The motor starting transformer equipment shall be designed and constructed to meet
these requirements.
2.07 Starting Procedure and Limitations
For the motor starter equipment the following starting procedure and limitations shall be valid:
a) The pump units will be started against fully closed or partial closed discharge
valve, to be defined and coordinated with the pump manufacturer, depending
on the final hydraulic requirements.
b) The motor start-up time shall be in the range of 20 seconds, but shall not
exceed 30 seconds.
c) The motor start-up current shall be reduced to value 3 times of the rated
motor current.
d) The motor start-up torque shall not be lower than 0.3 of rated torque, the
available torque difference between motor and driven pump shall not be lower
than 15%.
The detailed pump and motor data and the actual curves shall be requested by the respective
manufacturer. The feeding network configuration including feeding transformers and MV MCC
is shown on the single line diagrams. The actual layout and feeding network data are subject
to confirmation.
2.08 Safety and Interlocking Devices
The motor starter equipment shall be equipped with safety and interlocking devices to prevent
the following:
Closing of the circuit breakers in the service position, if they are not connected
to the auxiliary circuit,
On-load operation of the isolation and earthing apparatus,
Access to the live parts.

15 Mar, 2011
MCC Panel
General
The MCC panels shall be air insulated, industrial type, metal-clad, factory assembled, type
tested panels with self-standing cubicles and fix mounted switching devices. The cubicles
shall only be accessible from the front.
The MCC panels shall be suitable for indoor installation on cable cellar. The bottom shall be
covered with galvanized sheet steel, which is to provide with holes for cable entry. The cable
entries shall be designed in a manner such that a sealing after cable laying is possible without
any problem. Further, each cover sheet shall be equipped with a grounding connection to the
steel frame of cubicle.
The cubicles of the MCC panels shall be equipped with hinged doors, which are able to swing
out more than 90.
All nuts for fixing of components shall be welded on the steel structure or threads will be
cutted in the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self-cutting screws shall be avoided.
Separation
The MCC panel shall consist of cable termination cubicle(s), cubicles for bypass circuit
breaker and star-point circuit breaker and the necessary bus bar, surge arrestors and cabling
accessories. The circuit breakers may be installed in a common cubicle.
Each cubicle shall be equipped with a low voltage compartment, which is to placed in the
upper part.
The different cubicles and the low voltage compartment shall be separated against each other
by means of steel sheets. The isolation must be arc-proof.
All cubicles shall be equipped with separate pressure relief flaps. The pressure relief shall be
carried out upwards.
Cable Termination Cubicle
The cable termination cubicles shall be supplied with suitable metal fastenings for connection
of cable ends, or if necessary for bus bars. These fastenings shall be adapted, for each
cubicle, to the number and type of cables or bus bars used.
The cable connecting and fastening bars shall be arranged in such a way to allow easy and
safe connection of the number and type of cables and cores, designed for the particular MCC
panel.

15 Mar, 2011
Suitable cable fixing supports must be foreseen to secure the cable termination from any pull
tension.
Low Voltage Compartment
All measurement instruments, push buttons, switches, indication and alarm lamps, etc. shall
be mounted in the hinged front door and flexibly wired to the fixed part of the LV
compartment. All relays, miniature circuit breakers, etc. within the LV compartment shall be
rail mounted.
The LV compartment shall have a layout and arrangement to allow easy access to all
installed devices. On the door of the LV compartment a mimic diagram with position indication
of switching devices shall be placed.
For the wiring from the low voltage compartment to the bottom a covered cable duct shall be
foreseen.
Electrical Requirements
Protection
The system of protection shall be selected and coordinated in line with the feeding MCC data
and the connected equipment requirements:
To guarantee personnel and plant safety.

To ensure a sufficient protection against damages of the
equipment, this may arise from the internal and external short
circuits as well as from possible atmospheric discharges.
To ensure as far as possible the continuity of operation for
those parts not concerned by the fault. This will be achieved by
selecting the setting in a way such that in case of a fault the
closest protection device to the fault operates at first.
Bus Bars
The bus bars shall be selected according to the electrical requirements and shall be of high-
conductivity electrolytic copper.
The bus bar cross section shall be the same throughout the panel. It shall be adapted to
service and installation conditions. Flexible joints shall be provided wherever necessary to
avoid displacement due to expansion, or transmission of shocks and vibrations from the MCC
panel to the connections.
The utmost care shall be taken in the design of the position of the bus bar supports and the
layouts of the connections taking into consideration the following:
Electro-dynamic stresses in disturbed conditions,

Resonance phenomena,

15 Mar, 2011
Isolation distances,
Temperature rises of conductors in these conditions.
Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall be selected and equipped according to the requirements and will be fix
mounted. Only one type of circuit breaker for each making and breaking capacity shall be
used. The circuit breakers shall be three-pole vacuum type.
The operation of circuit breakers shall be carried out via motor driven spring loaded buffers. In
case of control voltage fault, the buffers shall be manually operable. The circuit breaker
position shall be visible with closed front doors.
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following devices:
Electrical control, closed contact operated, with anti-pumping

device and electric resetting device,
Tripping coil with supervision relay,
Auxiliary spare contacts, at least 4 NO and 4 NC brought out to
terminals,
Mechanical position indicators for switching position,
Indications for tripping and failure,
Operating push buttons for On and Off,
The necessary interlocks to prevent any fault operation.
The circuit breakers shall be suitable for short-time interrupt. For
switching of the circuit breakers the respective secondary
releases and locking magnets shall be provided.
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be of plug-in type and shall be provided with test plugs for measurement
on the front side. The test facilities shall be provided to permit testing without interruption of
the entire installation and service (on service testing).
Auxiliary relays shall be of the electromechanical type. Auxiliary contacts shall be able to
carry the maximum foreseen current. In any case their contact load shall be suitable for 230 V
AC/DC.
The relays shall be suitable for tropical climate and must be dust proof.
Overvoltage Protection
The MCC panels shall be designed and rated in a manner such that overvoltages caused by
switching and flashes, do not impair the safety in operation of the units.
The circuit breakers shall be provided with surge arrestors, equipped with easy visible
indicators for the healthiness of arrestors. The equipment inside of low voltage compartment
shall be separately protected against overvoltages.

15 Mar, 2011
Control and Monitoring
The control system shall be an integrated part of the MCC panel and shall include the control
and monitoring of the circuit breakers and the autotransformer. The control and monitoring
shall be performed with an integrated PLC unit, which shall also control the motor feeder
circuit breaker located in the MV MCC.
The following signals shall be transferred from/to remote systems, at least:
a) Data exchange with the station/unit control system

Commands
- Motor On,
- Motor Off.
Signals
- By-pass circuit breaker open,
- By-pass circuit breaker closed,
- Star-point circuit breaker open,
- Star-point circuit breaker closed,
- Summary alarm.
b) Data exchange with the motor feeder circuit breaker

Commands
- Circuit breaker On,
- Circuit breaker Off.
Signals
- Circuit breaker open,
- Circuit breaker closed.
The data exchange with the station/unit control system shall be performed via serial link, the
data exchange with the motor feeder circuit breaker will be carried out hardwired.
On the front door of one voltage compartment an indicator board shall be installed. All signals
and alarms shall be indicated on this board.
Earthing
All exposed conductive parts likely to be accidentally charged shall be joined together by an
earthing circuit. For this purpose a minimum 100 mm cross section bare copper earthing bus
shall be installed.
This earthing bus shall be connected to the general grounding system by means of
conventional cable connection terminals.
Within the panels, fastening screws and bolts shall ensure electric continuity. The
opening type panels, assembled on hinges shall be bonded to the enclosure by a tinned
copper braid, or hinges shall be certified for this purpose.

15 Mar, 2011
The following shall be also connected to the earthing circuit:
Secondary side of surge arrestors,

Leads of braid of the MV cables,
Operating handles, mounting plates, doors, etc.
In addition, two ends of the MCC panel shall be terminated to the general grounding system
by separate cables.
Control Voltage
The control voltage supply will be carried out from a 230 V AC UPS. Each MCC panel will be
provided with one power supply, protected by means of a 20 A or 25 A miniature circuit
breaker situated in the UPS distribution board. The sub-distribution of control voltage inside
MCC panel shall be carried out selective from the supply to the consumers. For motors of
spring loaded buffer and for control/monitoring different monitored miniature circuit breakers
shall be used.
All other necessary control and signal voltage levels shall be generated inside the MCC panel
of motor starter.
Anti-Condensation Heaters
If necessary, the MCC panels shall be equipped with anti-condensation heaters, which shall
be fed from the 230 V, 60 Hz level. Each MCC panel will be provided with one power supply,
protected by means of a 16 A miniature circuit breaker situated in a LV distribution board.
The heaters shall be humidity or temperature controlled.
A failure of heaters shall be indicated on the local indicator boards.
Compartment Lighting
The low voltage compartment of each cubicle shall be equipped with a lighting fixture,
switched via door contact.
The lighting fixtures may be fed from the circuits of anti-condensation heaters.
Auto - Transformer
General
The autotransformer shall be of the dry type, suitable for indoor installation within electrical
rooms.

15 Mar, 2011
The transformer shall be installed behind the MCC panel inside a separate, factory
assembled steel sheet enclosure. The enclosure shall be equipped with sufficient ventilation
openings to guarantee an adequate air circulation.
The main connection with the MCC panel shall be carried out with bus bars.
Cooling
The cooling of the transformers shall be air with natural circulation.
Base Frame
The base frame shall be fitted with flat-rim wheels which can be arranged for either
longitudinal or cross travel. The base form shall be screwed and shall be equipped with four
towing lugs.
Windings
The transformer shall be provided with copper windings, which shall be insulated with
humidity proof insulation.
Tap Changer
For tapping of secondary voltage a respective off-load tap changer with two additional
adjustable tap positions shall be provided.
The tap position of the secondary winding shall be calculated and proposed by the motor
starter equipment manufacturer, considering the given operating conditions and the pump
and motor data.
Instrumentation
The transformers shall be equipped with a temperature monitoring system. For each winding
two PTC temperature sensors (one for alarm and one for trip) shall be provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Painting


15 Mar, 2011
3.02 Installation
The delivery, installation and commissioning of the motor starter equipment shall include, but
not limited to the following items:
Grounding and potential equalization for the cubicles, including connection with the
next grounding bus bars,
Termination of all cables at the MCC panels,
Commissioning of the functioning motor starter equipment, including voltage feeding of
the bus bars and adjustment of all relays, protection devices, etc.,
Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during installation
and commissioning phase and during a training on site.
For transport and site installation purpose the transformer enclosure shall be
segregated from the MCC panel, if necessary the transformer itself may be shipped
separately.
3.03 Workshop Tests
All components of the motor starter equipment shall be tested completely and detailed in
manufacturers workshop. All tests required by the codes and standards as well as all
manufactures tests have to be performed.
accordance with the Project Procedure Manual.

Voltage withstand test, (1)
Short circuit withstand test, (1)
Test of warming, (1)
Check of protection against touching,
Power frequency voltage dry test, 1 minute,
Voltage test on auxiliary circuits, 1 minute 2 kV r.m.s,
Mechanical operation test on circuit breakers, including all adjacent equipment,
Operation test of the relays,
Check of mechanical details,
(1) Only type test certificates necessary

15 Mar, 2011
3.04 Site Tests

Performance test.
The workshop tests described in item except the power frequency voltage shall be repeated
on site by the Contractor after erection and before connection to outside sources.
Special care shall be taken for setting of protection devices, relays and timers, setting must
be done according to the approved start-up procedure, considering the data of the connected
pump motor equipment and the feeding MCC.
3.05 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the motor starter equipment
and their components.
The documentation of the motor starter equipment shall include the following documents and

b) Layout drawings for all devices, cubicles and enclosures
c) Layout drawings for the whole motor starter equipment
d) Single line diagrams
e) Block diagrams
f) Wiring diagrams
g) Termination drawings
h) Cable lists
i) Spare parts list
j) List of used devices with manufacturer
k) Software and software description
l) Operation and maintenance manual

15 Mar, 2011
with the Client.
3.06 Shipping
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged. Each unit should be
shipped as a common delivery. The material, especially loose parts and spare parts shall be
clearly labeled according to the designation.
All necessary special tools for operation and maintenance of the motor starter equipment
shall be supplied for each location, at least consisting of:
1 set of all special tools required for operation and maintenance of MCC panel and
transformer,
1 set of circuit breaker tools and consumables,
High voltage fuse tongs (if any),
High voltage detector,
Key set for cubicle doors and locks,
1 set of grounding equipment (ground rope and spider including fastening bolts and
clamps, connections tongs etc.),
Software for the PLC.
For storage of the above mentioned special tools per location a suitable cabinet, shelf or
console shall be delivered.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16483
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE




Page 1 of 16
ELECTRICAL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.02 References
1.03 Sumittals - For Review / Approvals
1.04 Submittals For Construction
1.05 Qualification
1.07 Operation and Maintenence Manuals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Construction
2.03 Control Fuctions
2.04 System Interfaces
2.05 Monitoring and Displays
2.06 Spare Parts
2.07 Enclosures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Factory Testing

3.02 Feild quality Control
3.03 Manufacturers Certification
3.04 Traning
3.05 Harmonic Study
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This specification describes the electrical, mechanical, environmental, agency and
reliability requirements for three-phase, adjustable frequency drives as specified
herein and as shown on the contract drawings. The VFD shall be install inside MCC
and shall be part of the MCC.
1.02 REFERENCES
The adjustable frequency drives and all components shall be designed, manufactured
and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of IEC, UL, CUL, and
NEMA.
1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL

The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1. Dimensioned outline drawing

2. Schematic diagram
3. Power and control connection diagram(s)
4. Product data sheets.
Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies

2. Composite front view and plan view of close-coupled assemblies
3. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION

The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed paragraph 1.04
2. Installation information.
The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings
and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
B. The supplier of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this
requirement.
C. The AFD manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network, engineering service
facilities within 250 miles of project to provide start-up service, emergency service calls, repair
work, service contracts, maintenance and training of customer personnel.
D. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable
seismic requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC) for Zone 4 application. Guidelines for
the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear
manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test response
spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum-damping factor, UBC: a peak of 2.15gs (3.2
11 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.86gs applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully
envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz.
E. For all connection and loading combinations of power and all energization and loading
combinations of the VFDs. The voltage and current distortion at the point of
connection of the VFD to power source shall meet the following criteria and the values
are based upon 480V systems.
1. The voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall not exceed 5% and individual
harmonic voltage distortion shall not exceed 3%.
2. Current distortion limits shall not exceed the values presented within IEEE 519 for
General Distribution Systems.
3. The maximum commutation notch depth shall be 20%.
4. The maximum notch area shall be 22,800 volt-microseconds.
5. The valves above are based upon 480V systems. Valves must be adjusted for actual
system voltage.
F. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless
specifically modified by the above referenced standards.
1. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with

the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil
engineer in the state. The manufacturer based upon approved shake table
tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment shall provide mounting
recommendations.
2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand,
that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral
required response spectra as specified in above codes.
3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for

proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be
considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds
the specified response spectra.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011

A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturers instructions. One
(1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
B. VFD Manufacturer shall perform all analysis and supply any equipment needed to ensure that
these performance criteria are met.
C. VFD Manufacturer shall perform a computer-simulated harmonic analysis. The analysis result
shall be provided to Client for review prior to the installation of the equipment. VFD
Manufacturer shall identify what electrical system information is required to perform analysis.
VFD Manufacturer shall allow a minimum of four (4) weeks for this information to be provided
by Client.
D. VFD Manufacturer shall contact motor manufacturer to coordinate the design of the
motor/VFD combination. VFD Manufacturer shall contact Client for the contact information of
the motor manufacturer. VFD Manufacturer shall provide documentation confirming that this
coordination has taken place, a maximum four (4) weeks after the placement of the order.
E. Motor shall be controlled by a buyer supplied AFD. AFD manufacturer to contact motor
manufacturer to coordinate the design of AFD/motor combination. Motor manufacturer shall
provide documentation confirming that this coordination has taken place, a maximum of four
(4) weeks after the placement of the order.
F. Following electrical information shall be given to the AFD manufacturer:One line showing
electrical system that he will be connecting his equipment to.Short circuit levels (phase and
ground)X/R ratio at the point where the AFD manufacturer is connecting his equipment.
G. Several motors shall be controlled with VFD'S and as shown in Project Drawings. VFD
manufacturer shall coordinate with motor manufacturer on the design of VFD/Motor
combination. Motor manufacturer shall provide documentation confirming that coordination
had taken place, a maximum of Four (4) weeks after placement of the order.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly
shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete
assembly and each major component.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. Cutler-Hammer
2. ABB
3. Siemens
4. Schneider Electric
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the
specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by
the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION
WHERE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 1
THROUGH 150 - 600 HP SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:
THE VFD SHALL BE RATED 480VAC. THE VFD SHALL PROVIDE MICROPROCESSOR-BASED
CONTROL FOR THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS.
The VFDs shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design

converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage
and frequency output via a two-step operation. Adjustable Current
Source VFDs are not acceptable. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors
(IGBTs) shall be used in the inverter section. Bipolar Junction
Transistors, GTOs or SCRs are not acceptable.
The VFDs shall have efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds
95% for VFDs below 15 Hp and 97% for drives 15 Hp and above. The
efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load.
The VFDs shall maintain the line side displacement power factor at no
less than 0.96, regardless of speed and load.
The VFDs shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 150%
and a two (2) second overload current rating of 250% for constant
torque drives.
The VFDs shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 110%
for variable torque drives.
The VFDs shall be capable of operating of operating any NEMA design

B squirrel cage induction motor, regardless of manufacturer, with a
horsepower and current rating within the capacity of the VFD.
The VFDs shall have a 3% nominal impedance integral AC three-phase

line reactor.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
The VFDs shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFDs shall
be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume
operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse
direction, the VFDs shall start into the motor in the reverse direction,
bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to
the preset speed.
Standard operating conditions shall be:
Incoming power: Three-phase [380] VAC, +10% to -5%, and 60 Hz (+/-

2 %) power to a fixed potential DC bus level
Frequency stability of +/-0.5% for 24 hours with voltage regulation of

+/-1% of maximum rated output voltage
Speed regulation of +/- 0.5% of base speed
Load inertia dependant carryover (ridethrough) during utility loss
Insensitive to input line rotation
Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing and non-corrosive)
Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet (1000 meters) above sea level
Ambient temperature: -10 to 50 degrees C (CT), -10 to 40 degrees C

(VT)
Storage temperature: -40 to 60 degrees C.
Phase unbalance + or -2%.
Spikes with a amplitude of 3.0 per unit and duration of 2ms (triangle
step). Spike shall be considered an ideal voltage.
Continuous but at reduce output power/torque:
Input voltage level: -5% to +10% for up to 200ms at reduced

power/torque.
2.03 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

A. Frequently accessed VFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital
operator keypad located on the front of the AFD. The VFDs shall have three-line
alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain
English words for parameters, status, and diagnostic messages. Alphanumeric codes
and tables are not acceptable.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
B. Standard advanced programming and troubleshooting functions shall be available by

using a personal computers RS-232 port and Windows based software. In addition
the software shall permit control and monitoring via the VFDs RS232 port. The
manufacturer shall supply the required software.
C. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the
following:
1. Monitor
2. Operate
3. Parameter setup
4. Actual parameter values
5. Active faults
6. Fault history
7. LCD contrast adjustment
8. Information to indicate the standard software and optional features
software loaded.
The following setups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available:
1. Start/stop command from keypad, remote or communications port

2. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port
3. Motor rotation selection
4. Maximum and minimum speed limits
5. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges
6. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance
7. Torque limit
8. Multiple attempt restart function
9. Multiple preset speeds adjustment
10. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection
11. Programmable analog output
12. DC brake current magnitude and time
13. Proportional/integral process controller.
2.04 SYSTEM INTERFACES:

Inputs A minimum of six (6) programmable digital inputs, two (2) analog inputs
and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following
available as a minimum:
1. Remote manual/auto
2. Remote start/stop
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Remote forward/reverse
4. Remote preset speeds
5. Remote external trip
6. Remote fault reset
7. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20 mAdc
8. Potentiometer and 1-10V DC speed reference interface
9. RS232 programming and operation interface port
10. Serial communications port.
Outputs A minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, one (1)
programmable open collector output, and one (1) programmable analog output
shall be provided, with the following available at minimum.
Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of Form C contacts for each,
selectable with the following available at minimum:
a. Fault
b. Run
c. Ready
d. Reversing
e. Jogging
f. At speed
g. In torque limit
h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded
i. Overtemperature.
Programmable open collector output with available 24V DC power supply and
selectable with the following available at minimum:
a. Fault
b. Run
c. Ready
d. Reversing
e. Jogging
f. At speed
g. In torque limit
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded

i. Overtemperature.
Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available

at minimum:
a) Output current
b) Output frequency
c) Motor speed
d) Motor torque
e) Motor power
f) Motor voltage
g) DC link voltage.
2.05 MONITORING AND DISPLAYS

The VFDs display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying three (3) lines of
text and the following thirteen (13) status indicators:
a) Run
b) Forward
c) Reverse
d) Stop
e) Ready
f) Alarm
g) Fault
h) Local
i) Panel
j) Remote
k) Hand
l) Auto
m) Off.
The VFDs display shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring
functions at a minimum:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
1. Output frequency
2. Output speed
3. Motor current
4. Motor torque
5. Motor power
6. Motor voltage
7. DC-link voltage
8. Heatsink temperature
9. Total operating days counter
10. Operating hours (resettable)
11. Total megawatt hours
12. Megawatt hours (resettable)
13. Voltage level of analog input
14. Current level of analog input
15. Digital inputs status
16. Digital and relay outputs status
17. Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable.
C. Protective Functions
The VFD shall include the following protective features at minimum:
a) Over-voltage
b) Inverter fault
c) Under-voltage
d) Phase loss
e) Output phase loss
f) Under-temperature
g) Over-temperature
h) Motor stalled
i) Motor over-temperature
j) Motor under-load
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
k) Logic voltage failure
l) Microprocessor failure
m) DC injection braking.
The AFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, and running.
AFDs with no ground fault protection during running are not acceptable.
Diagnostic Features
Fault History
Record and log faults.
Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 9 faults.
OPTIONS
Optional features to be included in the AFDs: (choose appropriate features)
1.
HMCP or thermal-magnetic breaker to provide a disconnect means.
Operating handle shall protrude from the door. The disconnect shall not
be mounted on the door. The handle position shall indicate ON, OFF,
and TRIPPED condition. The handle shall have provisions for
padlocking in the OFF position with at least three (3) padlocks.
Interlocks shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the AFD
door with the disconnect handle in the ON position. This shall be
defeatable by maintenance personnel.
2. Provide motor dv/dt filter, as described below, for use on motor cable
runs exceeding 100 feet.
The dv/dt filter shall be located at the AFD and shall reduce the dv/dt clamp any voltage
overshoots of the AFD output. It will return the energy in the voltage overshoots to the
AFDs DC bus. A power dissipative resistance device is not acceptable. Filter shall be a
Cutler-Hammer MotoRX 1000 volt per microsecond type for motor leads between 100 and
300 feet and 1000 volt per microsecond type for motor leads between 300 and 600 feet.
Output line reactors are not acceptable for any motor lead lengths.
AC input line current limiting fuses shall provide a means of disconnecting
the AFD from the line under fault conditions.
Three contactor bypass shall include a drive input disconnect, an AFD

input isolation contactor, bypass contactor and an AFD output contactor
that is electrically and mechanically interlocked with the bypass contactor.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
This circuit shall include control logic, status lights and motor overcurrent
relays. The complete bypass system Hand-Off-Auto with Inverter-Bypass
selector switch(s), and inverter/bypass pilot lights shall be packaged with
the AFD. The unit may be set up for 1[manual] [automatic] bypass
operation upon an AFD trip.
AC output contactor to provide a means for positive disconnection of the

drive output from the motor terminals
Fused space heaters with thermostat to operate when drive is shut down.
Laminated plastic or steel nameplate engraved with users identifying name

or number.
Pneumatic process follower allowing motor speed control proportional to a

3-15 PSIG pneumatic signal.
120V AC control to allow AFD to interface with remote dry contacts.
Motor overcurrent relay to provide motor overcurrent sensing of a given

level of load current.
Input isolation transformers, separately mounted, with NEMA 1 enclosure.
Dynamic braking control circuitry shall be provided to decelerate the motor

faster than the internal losses can absorb. Dynamic braking shall cause an
optional resistor bank, when specified, to be switched onto the DC link as
required to absorb the regenerative energy. This shall allow the fastest
controlled deceleration and/or stop without an overvoltage condition. The
resistor bank, when specified, shall be located external to the drive
enclosure to prevent overheating of the drive.
Resistor bank for dynamic braking load rated for [100] percent braking
torque for a [50] percent duty cycle based on a sixty-second cycle time
Graphical keypad
The operator interface shall consist of a LCD keypad located on the front of the AFD.
Features shall include:
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Twelve (12) pushbuttons for selection, display, and modification of the AFD
characteristics as follows:
1. Scroll left
2. Scroll right
3. Scroll up/increase
4. Scroll down/decrease
5. Parameter
6. Monitor
7. Page
8. Operate
9. Enter
10. Reset
11. Start
12. Stop.
The keypad LCD panel shall provide a choice of eight (8) lines of text or a 64x128 pixel
graphical display of key waveforms or a combination of both.
The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the
following screens:
1. Monitor
2. Operate
3. Parameter setup
4. Actual parameter values
5. Operating parameter trends
6. Menu for selection of parameters for graphical trend display
7. Active faults
8. Fault history
9. LCD adjustment
10. Info/files selection to indicate the standard software and optional
features software loaded.
Communication card for interface with (Johnson N2) (Modbus RTU) (DeviceNet)
(Interbus-S) (Profibus-DP) (Lonworks) (IMPAAC/PowerNet) (FLN -- Floor Level
Network) control system.
Provide an input EMI filter to minimize conducted electrical noise to meet the
requirements of IEC 61800-3.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2.06 SPARE PARTS

A spare main logic board, keypad and power supply board shall be supplied
for each different type of drive supplied under this specification.
2.07 ENCLOSURE
The AFD enclosure shall be NEMA 1 and shall be install as part of MCC.The
AFD shall have complete front accessibility with easily removable assemblies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY TESTING

The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment
provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest
version of UL and NEMA standards.
All final assemblies shall be tested at full load with application of line-to-line and
line-to-ground bolted faults. The adjustable frequency drive shall trip
electronically without device failure.
After all tests have been performed, each AFD shall undergo a burn-in test. The
drive shall be burned in at 100% inductive or motor load without an unscheduled
shutdown.
After the burn-in cycle is complete, each AFD shall be put through a motor load
test before inspection and shipping.
The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.

Provide the services of a qualified manufacturers employed Factory Authorized
Field Service Engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the
equipment specified under this section. Sales representatives will not be
acceptable to perform this work. The manufacturers service representative shall
provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly
of the equipment, installation as specified in manufacturers installation
instructions, wiring, application dependant adjustments, and verification of
proper AFD operation.
The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the
technical direction of the manufacturers service representative:
1. Inspection and final adjustments

2. Operational and functional checks of AFDs and spare parts
3. The contractor shall certify that he has read the drive
manufacturers installation instructions and has installed the
AFD in accordance with those instructions.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturers field start-
up report before final payment is made.
3.03 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATION

A qualified factory-trained manufacturers representative shall certify in writing
that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturers
representatives certification.
3.04 TRAINING
The manufacturers qualified representative shall conduct the training.
The training program shall consist of the following:
1. Instructions on the proper operation of the equipment
2. Instructions on the proper maintenance of the equipment.
3.05 HARMONIC STUDY

The AFD manufacturer shall perform harmonic measurements at the point where
the utility feeds multiple customers (PCC) to verify compliance with IEEE519-
1992. A report of the voltage THD and current TDD shall be sent to the
Engineer. The contractor shall provide labor, material, and protection as needed
to access the test points. The readings shall be taken with all drives and all other
loads at full load, or as close as field conditions allow.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 16512
OUTDOOR LIGHTING




Page 1 of 12
ELECTRICAL WORKS OUTDOOR LIGHTING
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 Tagging
2.04 Description of Lighting System
2.05 Rated Design Data
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Construction Requirements

3.02 Installation
3.03 Test
3.04 Documentation
3.05 Shipping

15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Scope
This specification covers the technical requirements for design, manufacturing, construction,
installation and test of the outdoor lighting within the station areas for the Transportation of
Treated Water from Taif STP to Maaden Gold mines.
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, test and commissioning of outdoor

lighting shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards, at least. The latest
IEC 60364 Electrical installation of buildings
IEC 60598 Luminaires
IEC 60621 Electrical installations for outdoor sites under heavy conditions
IEC 60664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
HCISS Security and safety directives (High Commission for Industrial

Security and Safety)
SSD 13 Security Lighting Systems
contract.
1.03 Submittals


15 Mar, 2011
for:

building lines.

installed.


instructions.

instructions.
The outdoor lighting shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated load under the climatic
and environmental conditions defined in the specification Basic Electrical Requirements.
The various equipments shall be appropriate for outdoor installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

15 Mar, 2011
same kind and type shall be selected for equivalent functions.
2.02 Tagging
screws.
For further requirements, reference is made to the specification Design and Construction of
2.04 Description of Lighting Systems
For the purpose of illumination at outdoor areas within stations, the lighting system shall be
divided into the following lighting sub-systems:
Station area lighting
The station area lighting will be provided for all above ground, non sheltered industrial areas
of a station, where operation and maintenance during night could be necessary.
The lighting shall mainly consist of flood light and street light fixtures, equipped with high
pressure discharge lamps mounted on poles and if necessary, with street lighting or build on
fixtures, equipped with fluorescent lamps mounted on poles or structures.
As far as possible, the maximum horizontal illumination levels of the lighting shall be near the
equipment, which must be controlled and operated.
Road/street and parking area lighting
The road/street and parking area lighting will be provided for all maintenance roads, traffic
areas and parking areas.
The lighting shall mainly consist of pole mounted street lighting fixtures, equipped with high
pressure discharge lamps.
The maximum horizontal illumination level of the lighting shall be in the middle (axis) of the
roads and parking areas, respectively.
Entrance lighting
The entrance lighting will be provided for all doors and gates of industrial and non industrial
buildings.

15 Mar, 2011
The entrance lighting shall mainly consist of wall mounted lighting fixtures, equipped with
fluorescent lamps.
Fence lighting
The fence lighting will be provided for the border fences of stations.
The fence lighting shall mainly consist of pole mounted flood light fixtures, equipped with high
pressure discharge lamps. The poles of fence lighting have to be installed inside the fence.
Distance, number of poles, illumination level and the design of the devices of fence lighting
must be in accordance with the HCISS and SSD 13 requirements.
2.05 Rated Design Data
The outdoor lighting shall be designed on basis of the following minimum requirements:
a) Average of illumination levels (Em)
Station areas 30 lx,

Roads, streets 10 - 12 lx,
Parking areas 10 lx,
Entrances 50 lx,
Fences 5 10 lx or other values, if required by HCISS.
b) Uniformity of illumination levels
Station areas 1 : 3,
Roads, streets 1 : 6,
Parking areas 1 : 6,
Fences 1: 5.
The uniformity of illumination levels means the ratio between the lowest and the highest
measured horizontal illumination level in the reference area.
The outdoor lighting shall be fed with a voltage of 3 x 480/230 V, 60 Hz, or with other voltages
if supplied from existing switchboards (extension of existing stations).
maintenance issues.

15 Mar, 2011
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Construction Requirements
General
The outdoor lighting shall be supplied from a common outdoor lighting panel, which shall be
placed indoor. To minimize the cable lengths, the mentioned panel should be installed at a
central location. If necessary for large areas, a second panel shall be used. The entrance
lighting may be fed via the distribution panel of electrical building installation of the respective
building.
The outdoor lighting panels shall be provided with a main conductor, controlled via
photocell/twilight switch. The panels shall be equipped with a sufficient number of 3-phase
circuits (including 20 % spare circuits), which shall be fused in maximum with 16 A miniature
circuit breakers (B-characteristic). The load on each of the circuits should not exceed 4 kW.
Each lighting circuit shall be provided with a manual override to allow the operation from the
outdoor lighting panel. The operation elements shall be located behind the hinged door(s) of
the panel. The different kinds of outdoor lighting shall be supplied via separate circuits that
mean the supplies for station area lighting, road/street lighting, entrance lighting and fence
lighting shall not be mixed.
As mentioned above, the main supply for outdoor lighting circuits shall be 400 V AC. To arrive
the lighting supply voltage of 230 V AC, each lighting pole will be equipped with an inside
located fuse box and for entrances the lighting will be divided into three 1-phase circuits by
means of a main junction box.
If the entrance lighting will be fed from the distribution panel of electrical building installation,
the supply can be provided via a 230 V AC single-phase circuit with contactor,
photocell/twilight switch and manual override per building. The load on these circuits should
not exceed 1 kW.
If the outdoor lighting will be installed as an extension of an existing outdoor lighting system,
the new poles, towers, lighting fixtures and as well the arrangement of the new outdoor
lighting system part shall be according to the existing facilities.
Lighting Poles
Poles for Flood Light
Flood light poles shall be provided as conical columns, fabricated from hot dip galvanised
steel. The height of the poles shall be between 10 and 20 m.
The poles shall be equipped with the following accessories:

Flange plate (hot dip galvanized steel) with 4 to 6 slots including stud bolts and screws,
which allow also the adjustment of the pole,
Brackets or platform for installation up to six flood light fixtures,
Fix mounted, hot dip galvanized steel ladder to the brackets/platform with protection grid,

15 Mar, 2011
Door opening with cover in the lower part of the pole,

Fuse/terminal box (IP44), mounted within the pole,
Internal wiring from fuse/terminal box to fixtures,
Identification label with pole number (stainless steel).
The cable entry shall be provided with PE conduits, running through the foundation of the
pole.
Poles for Street Light
Street light poles shall be provided as conical fiberglass columns. The height of the poles
shall be 10 m.
Flange plate (hot dip galvanized steel) with 4 to 6 slots including stud bolts and screws,
which allow also the adjustment of the pole,
Brackets for installation of one or two street light fixtures,
Fuse/terminal box (IP44), mounted within the pole,
pole.
Poles for special Applications of Area Light
Poles for special applications of area light or light for footpaths shall be provided as conical
columns, fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel. The height of the poles shall be between 4
and 6 m.
Flange plate (hot dip galvanized steel) with 4 slots including stud bolts and screws, which
allow also the adjustment of the pole,
Bracket/cross arm for installation of one or two fixtures with fluorescent lamps (luminary
incline 15),
Fuse/terminal box, mounted within the pole,
pole.

15 Mar, 2011
Lighting Fixtures
Flood Light Fixture
The flood light fixtures shall consist of the following main parts:
High pressure die-cast aluminium body and front cover frame, polyester powder coated
(IP65),
Electro polished, anodized and sealed aluminium reflector,
Lamp holder with adjustable for centralizing the lamp within the fixture,
toughened front glass,
hinged front cover,
integral gear with capacitor,
Galvanized steel stirrup with protractor for setting of elevation angle.
The flood light fixtures shall be equipped with high pressure mercury vapour lamps or high
pressure sodium vapour lamps with sufficient wattage.
For sodium vapour lamps only types shall be used, which have a quality of color reproduction
equal to mercury vapour lamps (yellow light will not be accepted).
The fixtures shall be specially protected against damage in case of sandstorms.
Street Light Fixture
The street light fixtures shall consist of the following main parts:
high pressure die-cast aluminium canopy, polyester powder coated (IP65),

hydro formed, one piece reflector in high purity aluminium, anodized and brightened,
high resistant polycarbonate bowl with snap-fit side catches,
integral gear with capacitor,
Re-positional steel column clamping bracket for post top fixing (angle of inclination 0 to
15).
The street light fixtures shall be equipped with high pressure mercury vapour lamps or high
pressure sodium vapour lamps with sufficient wattage.
For sodium vapour lamps only types shall be used, which have a quality of color reproduction
equal to mercury vapour lamps (yellow light will not be accepted).
Lighting Fixture with Fluorescent Lamps
The lighting fixtures with fluorescent lamps shall consist of the following main parts:

15 Mar, 2011
canopy from high resistant glass reinforced polyester (IP54),

reflector from polycarbonate,
high resistant polycarbonate bowl with snap-fit side catches,
integral electronic gear with power factor correction,
Steel column bracket for side entry or brackets for wall/structure mounting.
The lighting fixtures shall be equipped with fluorescent lamps up to 2 x 58 W.
Cables and Grounding
The lighting cables shall be three phase single pole connection with single phase. The
connection shall take into consideration the load balance on the three phase system.
The cross section must be determined according to the current capacities and the voltage
drops. The minimum cross section shall be 2.5 mm.
Separate grounding connection of the lighting poles and lighting towers with the grounding
network shall be provided.
The cables and the grounding shall be in accordance with specification Cables and Cable
Laying and Earthing and Lightning Protection, respectively.
3.02 Installation
The excavation of the cable trenches and foundation holes for outdoor lighting shall be
coordinated with the excavation for cable laying and grounding.
For cable laying, cable trenches and grounding see specification Cables and Cable Laying
and Earthing and Lightning Protection, respectively.
The erection of the lighting poles and towers including the concrete foundation is part of this
specification, the depth and the construction of the concrete foundation must be designed in
accordance with the soil conditions and the kind of the lighting pole.
Concrete foundations shall be equipped with connection plates and stud bolts for fastening
and adjustment of poles. A removable cover shall be provided for these bolts.
The electrical connection of the lighting poles to the supply cable must be executed in
alternating cycle to guarantee a constant load distribution to the phases. The various outdoor
lighting systems must be divided in different lighting circuits.

15 Mar, 2011
3.03 Test
After erection of the outdoor lighting system all electrical installations shall be tested in
accordance with applicable IEC regulations.
The horizontal lighting levels shall be checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Client.
The test results of the lighting level measurements shall be recorded in a respective report by
the Contractor.
The checking method shall be worked out by the contractor prior to tests and shall be subject
to the Client's approval.
3.04 Documentation

commissioning, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair of the outdoor lighting and its
components.
The documentation shall be in English language.
The final documentation of outdoor lighting shall at least include the following documents and
a) Technical data sheets,

b) Leaflets of devices,
c) Layout drawings,
d) Circuit diagrams,
e) Wiring diagrams,
f) Termination drawings,
g) Cable lists,
h) Calculation of illumination levels,
i) Calculation of stability for poles,
j) List of used devices with manufacturer,
k) Spare parts list,
l) Operation and maintenance manuals,
The documentation has to be prepared in accordance with the relevant ISO standards.

15 Mar, 2011
of the signed protocols in electronic form, also. The type of the electronic files and the number
of copies shall be agreed with the Client.
3.05 Shipping
All equipment, material and spare parts shall be sufficient packaged. The material, especially
loose parts and spare parts shall be clearly labeled according to the designation.
The following spare parts and special tools shall be supplied:
special tools for maintenance,

spare fuses, spare lamps and lighting fixtures in sufficient number for commissioning and
two years operation,
one mobile hydraulic operated lifting platform for each major station, in order to reach the
lighting fixtures at the poles.
- END OF SECTION -

15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16530
SITE LIGHTINGS




Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL SITE LIGHTINGS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 Coordination
1.04 References
1.05 Quality Assrence
1.06 Submittals
1.07 Delivery, Storage and handling
1.08 Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Lighting Fixtures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Grounding
3.03 Pole Standards
3.04 Concrete Pads
3.05 Tests
3.06 Adjustment
3.07 Adjustment and Cleaning
3.08 Final Acceptance
3.09 Manufacturer
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section of the specifications covers the furnishing of all labor and materials for a
complete area lighting system.
B. The work to be performed consists of the installation of pole standards, lighting

fixtures, lighting controls, secondary power distribution, including conduit work,
complete as indicated on drawings and as hereinafter specified.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Determine the work to be performed by the building contractors and other trades
throughout. Provide the type and amount of materials and equipment necessary to
place this work in proper operation, completely installed, wired, tested, and ready for
use.
Furnish and install related work and materials in strict accordance with the following sections
of this specification:
A. Section 16010 Basic Electrical requirements.
B. Section 16110 Raceways
C. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
E. Section 16452 Grounding and Bonding.
F. Section 16470 Panelboards.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and

recommendations of the following standards:
1. SAUDI Electricity Standards specifically:
a. TES-P-119.25
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. (NEMA).
4. National Fire Protection Assoc. (NFPA).
7. Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
8. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA).
9. All Govt. Laws, Ordinances and Regulations.
A. Provide manufacturer's certificate or furnish such evidences as necessary to Client to

assure that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified.
1.06 SUBMITTALS

may be required. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to
time. Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer's published data, installation
and roughing-in data sheets and drawings indicating compliance with the Contract
documents.
B. Submittals shall be submitted within three (3) weeks after the contract start date.
C. All metric substitutes for Schedule 40 and 80 conduit and fittings shall be submitted for
approval three (3) week after the contract start date.
A. Protect all materials and equipment from damage during handling and storage. Refer
to specifications Section 16010 - "Basic Electrical Requirements" for complete work
scope.
1.08 TESTING
A. Before shipment, each piece of equipment shall be tested to insure proper operation
completion of testing shall be sent to the Client Representative.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Refer to lighting fixture schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate all work with other crafts and other utilities and construction
items of project. Determine in advance of trenching the location and the depth of
other utilities and structures in order to determine possible conflict, to prevent
damage, and whether they can be passed with proper clearance.
B. Trench Excavation and Backfilling: Shall be in accordance with Section -Earthwork,

General. Sand bedding shall be as shown on the drawings. Place precast red
concrete planks in backfill as shown on the drawings.
C. Underground Secondary: To be installed in PVC conduit of sizes indicated. Cap or

plug conduit ends during construction. Before any wire is pulled in a conduit, pull thru
the conduit a mandrel 1/4 inch smaller in diameter than the I.D. of the conduit; then
swab thoroughly with a stiff brush. Use factory elbows where possible. Make
necessary field bends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Do not install any conduit that has been flattened in bending. PVC conduit must
transit to rigid steel, PVC coated conduit before emerging above grade. Accessible
ends shall support a grounded bushing and shall be bonded to equipment grounding
system.
D. Above Ground wiring shall be installed in rigid galvanized steel conduit PVC coated.
E. Bond conduits throughout to form an electrically continuous system.
F. Install conduit vertically or horizontally or parallel to supporting structure. Make field

bends and offsets uniform and symmetrical without flattening.
All field bends shall be of approved code radius. Use factory elbows wherever
possible, of the approved allowable radius for conductor applicable.
G. Joint conduit with couplings and fittings. All conduit shall be watertight, apply red lead
to the male thread. No running threads will be allowed. Do not remove the
galvanized coating with excessive threads. Install conduits, fittings and cast boxes in
a manner to prevent moisture from entering the conduit system cap or plug conduit
ends during construction. Clean conduits after installation with a mandrel and wire
brush prior to pulling conductors.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3.02 GROUNDING
A. All steel conduit, poles and metal equipment housings including light fixtures shall be
effectively and permanently grounded in strict accordance with the National Electrical
Code and as shown on the drawings. Conduit shall not be used as an equipment
ground path.
3.03 POLE STANDARDS
A. Install all pole standards in strict accordance with TES-P-119.25 and the
manufacturer's recommendations. All pole standards shall be plumb with lighting
fixtures.
3.04 CONCRETE PADS
A. Provide concrete pads in accordance with TES-P-1119.25. Pole standard size and
details shown on the drawings. Support rebar shall be incorporated into the concrete
pad pour.
3.05 TESTS
A. Perform all tests required. Test shall be performed in the presence of the Client
Representative.
3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damage to building, piping or equipment. During Progress of work, maintain

job in orderly condition. At completion of work, remove excess debris and materials.
3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. No work shall be accepted until it has the approval of the Client Representative as
being in accordance with this Specification and the Drawings.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide "as-built" drawings prior to final
acceptance of the project.
3.08 MANUFACTURER
A. The above named manufacturers are only for general conformance with the design
concept. Equal approved lighting and poles are acceptable, providing, all evidence
required to support this contention is in accordance with these specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16535
EMERGENCY LIGHTING




Page 1 of 7
ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description of Work
1.03 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
2.02 Emergency Light Set, Exist Light
2.03 Emergency Flourecent Power Supply
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Adjusting and Cleaning
3.03 Grounding
3.04 Feild quality Control
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section includes emergency light sets, exit fixtures with integral emergency
battery backup, and emergency fluorescent fixture power supplies with integral battery
backup.
B. Related Sections: The following Section contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting Fixtures" for regular fixtures that may be
connected to emergency circuits to provide emergency lighting.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA
70 "National Electrical Code."
B. UL Compliance: Emergency lighting fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 99, "Health Care
Facilities" and NFPA 101, "Life Safety Code."
D. Local Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local codes and regulations for
emergency lighting and exit signage including, but not limited to, colors and letter
heights for exit signs.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of emergency lighting unit specified. Assemble in booklet
form with separate sheet for each fixture, arranged in unit "type," alphabetical, or
numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each
sheet.
B. Samples of specific individual products for approval where indicated.
C. Maintenance data for units specified, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical
Requirements." Submit complete manual material concurrently with system submittal
and updated final versions of manuals with closeout procedures specified in Division 1
Section "Project Closeout."
D. Installation instructions written by manufacturers for all specified products.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
A. Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry space in original container.
Protect products from fumes and construction traffic.
A. Furnish stock of replacement lamps amounting to 15 percent (but not less than one
lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to
the following:

following:
1. Chloride Systems
Cooper Industries, Inc.

Dual-Lite, Inc.
Emergi-Lite, Inc.
Fulton Industries
Halo Lighting
Holophane Lighting
Hubbell, Inc. Legion Lighting Co., Inc.
Lightalarms Electronics Corp.
Lithonia Lighting
L.P.I., Inc.
Mule Emergency Lighting, Inc.
Siltron Illumination, Inc.
Thomas Industries, Inc.
2.02 EMERGENCY LIGHT SET, EXIT SIGN
A. Self-contained, a.c. battery-illuminated exit sign unit, universal mounting with

downlight.
1. Lamps: Manufacturer's standard, furnished with unit.
Style, shape, trim, material, finish, and arrangement of housing as indicated.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
2. Faceplate: High-impact, UL 94 V-O rated, plastic with snap- out arrows and
color of letters as indicated.
3. Mounting provisions shall suit individual installation conditions. Battery:

Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type, with 10- year nominal life.
4. Charger: Minimum 2-rate, fully automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer
relay.
5. Finish: Matte white for exposed parts, or as indicated.
6. Operation: Sign is illuminated by a.c.-powered lamps under normal conditions.

Relay turns emergency lamps on automatically when supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. Lamps operate for duration of
outage, up to 1.5 hours. Lamps automatically disconnect from battery when
voltage approaches deep-discharge value. When normal voltage is restored,
a.c.-powered lamps are relighted and d.c. lamps are switched off. Battery is
automatically recharged within 16 hours and maintained on trickle charge.
2.03 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY
A. Internal Type: For designated fluorescent fixtures, provided under Division 16 Section
"Lighting Fixtures," provide internal self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit,
factory mounted within the fixture body.
1. Arrange unit with test switch and LED indicator light, visible and accessible
without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.
2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, with normal 10-year

life, minimum.
3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
4. Operation: Relay turns two lamps on automatically when supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. Lamps operate for duration of
outage, up to 1.5 hours. When normal voltage is restored, battery is
automatically recharged.
B. External Type: For designated fluorescent fixtures, provided under Division 16

Section "Lighting Fixtures," provide external self-contained, modular, battery-inverter
unit.
1. Arrange unit with test switch and LED indicator light, visible and accessible
without entering ceiling space.
2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, with normal 10-year

life, minimum.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
4. Operation: Relay turns two lamps of associate fixture on automatically when

supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. Lamps operate
for duration of outage, up to 1.5 hours. When normal voltage is restored,
battery is automatically recharged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Setting and Securing: Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls and
secure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop
drawings. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Mounting heights specified or indicated are to bottom of fixture for suspended or

ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures.
C. Support: Recessed and semi recessed fixtures may be supported from suspended
ceiling support system if the ceiling system support rods or wires are installed at a
minimum of four rods or wires per fixture and located not more than 6 inches from
fixture corners. For fixtures smaller than the ceiling grid, install a minimum of four
rods or wires per fixture and locate at corner of the ceiling grid in which the fixture is
located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures smaller
than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support
fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured
to the ceiling tees. Rods or wires for Section "Acoustical Treatment." Install support
clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near each
fixture corner.
D. Lamping and Connection: Lamp units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Make external wiring connections required for proper functioning.
E. Coordinate with other electrical installations as appropriate for proper installation of

emergency lighting fixtures.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean emergency units light set upon completion of installation.
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide light intensities in egress paths.
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Ground non-current-carrying parts of equipment. Where the copper grounding

conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined
connectors suitable for this purpose.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
A. Tighten grounding connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL

Standard 486A.
A. Tests: After emergency lighting units have been installed and building circuits have
been energized with normal power source, apply and interrupt electrical energy to
demonstrate proper operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new
units and proceed with retesting. Give the Company Representative advance notice
of dates and times for all field tests. Provide instruments as required to make positive
observation of test results. Include the following in tests:
1. Duration of supply.
2. Low battery voltage shutdown.
Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
3. Low supply voltage transfer.
B. Insulation Resistance Test: Perform as specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and

Cables" both before and after connection of fixtures and equipment.
C. Electrical Continuity Tests: Perform as specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and

Cables."
D. Lamp Replacement: Prior to tests, install new lamps in emergency lighting units.
After testing, place malfunctioning lamps.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS




Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL FIRE ALRAM SYSTEMS
SUBSECTION INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 Coordination
1.04 References
1.06 Submittals
1.07 System Operation
1.08 Company Representative
1.09 Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
2.02 System Devices
2.03 Enviromental Conditions
2.04 Indoor Air Conditioned Equipment
2.05 Electrical Power
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
3.02 Manufacturer
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
PART 1 -GENERAL
A. The Fire Alarm System shall be a real time monitoring system that shall provide a fire
alarming to allow early fire detection. The Fire Alarm System shall accurately locate
a fire and shall provide the required directions for an effective fire fighting procedure.
B. Fire Alarm System shall be analogue type for all buildings.
C. Fire Alarm detectors, and essential hardware for the fire alarm system shall be
procured, installed, and tested by CONTRACTOR.
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Determine the work to be performed by the building contractors and other trades
throughout. Provide the type and amount of materials and equipment necessary to
place this work in proper operation, completely installed, wired, tested, and ready for
use.
A. Section 15891 Metal Ductwork-low pressure
B. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements
C. Section 16110 Raceways.
D. Section 16120 Wires and Cables
E. Section 16195 Electrical Identification
G. Section 16452 Grounding And Bonding.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards.
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) STD No. 72.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
7. All Government Laws, Regulations and Ordinates
A. The system shall be installed, connected and tested under the supervision of a
qualified Contractor and/or Subcontractor normally engaged in this type of work and
shall have performed such work for at least the past three years and shall be
prepared to furnish such evidence to Client.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. In compliance with requirements of the contract, submit the following Shop Drawings
and catalog cuts where applicable for the Client's review and certification:
1. Catalog Cuts
a. Duct mounted smoke detectors(HVAC ducts).
b. Visual / audible alarms bells.
2. Shop Drawings
a. System wiring schematics.
b. Interconnection diagrams.
B. In addition to the above, submit operating and maintenance manuals, complete with
spare parts list.
C. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
products.
1.07 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The actuation of automatic initiating device shall cause alarm signals to sound and
visual signals to illuminate, from which the device was actuated. The automatic
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
device which initiated the alarm shall be equipped with an indicator fitted into the base
or body of the detector.
In addition, the duct smoke detector shall deactivate all air input fan units
simultaneously via auxiliary relays.
1.08 COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
A. A company trained representative shall personally supervise the complete installation

and final testing of the system. Upon completing of the acceptance tests, the
Contractor shall instruct the Client Representative in the proper operation and testing
of the system.
1.09 TESTING
A. Before shipment, each piece of equipment shall be tested to insure proper operation
completion of testing shall be sent to the Client Representative.
A. Protect all materials and equipment from damage during handling and storage. Refer
to specification Section 16010 - "Basic Electrical Requirements" for complete work
scope.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall supply and install a complete and ready-to-use HONEYWELL,

PYROTRONICS, SIMPLEX or equivalent system devices as described herein and
shown on the drawings. The intent of these specifications is to provide a complete and
satisfactorily operating system complete with all equipment and installation materials
required, whether or not enumerated herein or shown on the plans. Coordinate with
the mechanical plans to insure proper location of smoke duct detectors.
B. It is the intent of this specification for a single source fire alarm manufacturer to supply
all detectors in the system whether they are shown on the electrical or mechanical
drawings. Manufacturer is to coordinate any mounting provisions required for his
devices with the HVAC equipment supplier finally selected.
C. Upon completion of system installation and before final inspection, Contractor shall
thoroughly check the devices. He shall certify in a letter to Client Representative that
each duct smoke detector, have been checked and are as specified, that all items
have been prepared and Client Representative has been instructed in the fire alarm
system.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
D. Upon acceptance of fire alarm system, equipment manufacturer shall assume

complete responsibility for replacement of any defective equipment during warranty
period of one year at no cost to Client.
E. Primary power source shall be 120V, 60 Hz as provided on the drawings.
F. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish wiring diagrams and equipment specification

submittals for Client Representative approval prior to installation.
G. System wiring shall be installed in accordance with this specification and

manufacturer's recommendations and shall be run in conduit as required by this
specification, sizes as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and in strict
accordance with the NEC and SAUDI Electricity Engineering Standards. Systems
shall test free from grounds, opens or short circuits. Circuitry shall be Class A
supervised system so long as the system operation listed below is met. All wiring to
be color coded.
2.02 System Devices
a. Duct smoke detectors
i. Ionization duct smoke detectors shall contain a unipolar dual chamber

configuration with one reference chamber to compensate for ambient
conditions with nominal sensitivity of 1.5%/foot obscuration.
ii. Each Duct smoke detector shall contain an LED.
iii. Each duct smoke detector shall contain a magnetically actuated test
switch such that it can be tested for the required alarm functionality.
b. All fire alarm bells/horns shall be UL listed for fire protective service and
operated from 120VAC and shall provide an audible/visual indication of fire
condition.
c. General fire alarm should be distinct from any background noise or any
signaling device used for other purposes.
d. General alarm shall provide 92 dB level at 10 feet.
e. Bell/horn shall include an integral flashing strobe light with white polycarbonate
lens and red "FIRE" lettering. The strobe shall be factory wired to operate in
unison with the bell/horn and shall produce 800 peak candle power at
approximately one flash per second. Bells or/and horns shall be mounted
indoor or outdoor as shown on the drawings.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
f. Audible alarm bell shall be mounted as indicated on drawings. Provide single

stroke solenoid plunger type, with dull chrome plated gong and bright red
finished base suitable for standard 100mm (4") box mounting.
2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The system shall be capable of operating continuously when subject to the environmental
conditions of the installation Site.
2.04 INDOOR AIR CONDITIONED ENVIRONMENT
The temperature range is 10oC to 35oC with a maximum rate of change 0.5C per minute.
The relative humidity range is 20% to 80% non condensing.
2.05 ELECTRICAL POWER
All electrical equipment shall conform to the National Electrical code, NFPA 70.
All equipment shall be capable of operating from 120 VAC with +/- 5 percent variation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish wiring diagrams and equipment specification

submittals for the Client Representative approval prior to installation.
B. System wiring shall be installed in accordance with this specification and

manufacturer's recommendations and shall be run in conduit as required by this
specification, sizes as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and test-free
grounds, opens or short circuits.
C. All detector locations shall be reviewed by the Contractor with respect to HVAC
equipment and building features to insure that devices will operate properly.
Submittals shall include shop drawings indicating any proposed changes in detector
locations.
C. Upon completion of system installation and before final inspection, Contractor shall
thoroughly check the fire alarm system. He shall certify in a letter to the Client
Representative that each duct smoke detector, have been checked and are as
specified, that all items have been prepared and the Client Representative has been
D. Instructed of the operation of the system.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3.02 MANUFACTURER
A. The above named manufacturers are only for general conformance with the design
concept. Equal approved Fire Detection / Alarm System Equipment are acceptable,
providing, all evidence required to support this contention is in accordance with these
specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
STAMP:
DIVISION 16
SITE WORKS
SECTION 16890
FIBER OPTIC CABLE


IFB 00 25/3/2011 Issue for Review IGA MAM MFU

DICIPLINE: TELECOMMUNICATION DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Page 1 of 11
ELECTRICAL WORK FIBER OPTIC CABLE
PART-1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This specification defines the minimum requirements on manufacturing, testing and delivery
of the Fiber Optic Cable (FOC). The cable shall serve as the transmission medium for a Fiber
Optic Transmission System.
The laying of the Fiber Optic Cable, the Conduit and the Transmission System are subject of
separate specification Division-16 Section-16890 Fiber Optic Cable Conduit and FOC
Installation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
Division-1 General Requirement of Project and Works/Project Execution
MGBM-SOW-0001 Project Description
Section 02210 Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
Section 01400 Quality Control
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
The manufacturing, construction, labeling and testing of the FOC system shall meet the
requirements established in the following codes standards and recommendations and in the
enclosed data sheet:
A. Standards - Fiber Optical Cable (FOC)
Optical fiber
ITU-T G.652 D characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable and/or
IEC 60793-1-1 optical fibers - generic specification
IEC 60793-2 optical fibers - product specifications fiber optical cable
ITU-T L.10 optical fiber cables for duct and tunnel application and/or
IEC 60794 -1 optical fiber cables - generic specification
IEC 60794 -2 optical fiber cables - indoor cables
IEC 60794 -3 optical fiber cables - outdoor cables
IEC 60304 Fiber or Tube Colors
IEC-60794-1 (or) EIA/TIA-455 Testing Procedures
B. Standards Measuring methods
IEC 60793-1-2
Optical Fibers generic specification measuring methods for dimension
DISCIPLINE: TELECOMMUNICATION DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
IEC 60793-1-3
Optical Fibers generic specification measuring methods for mechanical
characteristic
IEC 60793-1-4
Optical Fibers - generic specification - measuring methods for transmission
and optical characteristic
IEC 60811
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric and
Optical cables.
ITU-T G.650 (2000), Definition and test methods for the relevant parameters of single-
mode fibers.
C. Other Standards
ITU-T K.25 protection of optical fiber cables
IEC 60304 standard colors for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires
Wherever codes, standards and recommendations are mentioned, the latest
Published revision or issue shall be applicable.
A. Quality Assurance: The Contractor shall comply with ISO 9001 quality assurance
and quality control requirement
B. Pre-Installation Test: Each fiber of the fiber optic cable will be pre-tested, prior to start
of open trenching operation/lying of cable. An OTDR will be used
to verify length, continuity and attenuation of each fiber. Results
of the tests will be documented, recorded and signed by the
contractor project manager and the MAADAN representative. On
completion of this test, the tester will satisfactorily reseal both of
the cable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Delivery Documents:
The documents to be provided per cable drum shall comprise: Manufacturer test procedure
and recommended installation procedure, manufacturers specifications, catalog data,
descriptive matter, illustration and certification.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Drum number
Manufacturer
Cable type
Cable length
Data sheet
Test results of manufacturer
Results of RoC test
1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
The Manufacturer shall have local representative in Saudi Arabia and shall have minimum
five (5) years experience in supplying FOC, conduit and other accessories and also able to
supply necessary tools required for the installation.
1.7 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS, EXCEPTIONS
The contractor shall notify the client Representative any conflict between this specification,
the codes and standards and any other specifications included as part of the contract
documents, which may be applicable for all as show in scope. Any exceptions to this
specification and referenced documentation shall be raised by the contractor and approved
by the client Representative in writing
The contractor/vendor shall be responsible for providing FOC on site, unloaded and stored (if
necessary) in such a way that damages are avoided.
The FOC shall be suitably protected against damage during shipment and storage, pack the
material to ensure environmental and transit protection of the equipment and the contractor
shall submit packing design and packing details for Maaden & Design office approval.
Storage supports and stacking heights must be selected in such a way that steady
deformations of the cable conduits are avoided. Drums shall be secured against roll off.
PART-2: PRODUCTS
2.1 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
2.1.1 General:
The fiber optic cable will be laid in parallel to the water pipeline in the same trench, the
FOC shall be outdoor rodent proof, direct buried cable without conduits. Therefore a fully
dielectric fiber optic cable suitable for direct buried applications, filled with compound to
prevent axial and longitudinal ingress of water and / or soluble chemicals throughout the
cable shall be provided. The cable shall have loose tubes as secondary coating of fibers.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
The cable shall contain a number of 6 fibers. Traction elements shall be made out of
Kevlar or equivalent. The allowable tensile loading of the cable shall be 2.500 3.000 N,
suitable for direct blowing or pulling the cable into cable ducts. The outer cladding of the
cable shall consist of black PE. Other colour Coding and labeling of the particular cable
components shall be according to IEC 60304.The colour-coding system shall be
discernible throughout the design life of the cable. Cable markings shall be printed on the
outer fiber cable jacket. The markings shall be permanent, insoluble in water and be
legible for the duration of cable life. The markings shall be printed at intervals of not more
than 2 meters.
2.1.2 Detail Description:
Fiber optic cable specifications the following parameters of the fiber shall be met:
Performance characteristic at 1310 window & 1550 window

Attenuation @ wavelength: 1310 nm <= 0.5 db/km & 1550 nm <=0.3db/km
Variation of attenuation between 0 c & 70 c: - 0.01 db
Chromatic dispersion coefficient <= 3.5 ps/(nm.km) & 5.3 ps/nm.km
Zero dispersion slope: <=0.085 ps/(nm2.km)
Cable cutoff wavelength: < 1260 nm
Attenuation discontinuities at 1310 nm < 0.1 db
Attenuation change 1300 to 1324 nm < 0.09 db/km
ITU G.652 compliance:
All dielectric, loose buffered, filled, for underground and direct buried
environment.
Non-metallic, including strength member
Tensile strength: >= 10n
Mode field diameter: 8.6 - 9.5 microns +-10% @ 1310 nm
Cladding diameter: 125.0 microns
Concentricity error: < 1 micron
Proof-test stress 0.69gpa (minimum)
Expected fiber life span: 20 years
Fiber will comply with ccitt recommendation ITU G652.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Otical path discrete reflectance and return loss in accordance with

requirements of 4, ITUG.652
2.1.3 Cable design in general:
The structure of the cable core shall permit high cable flexibility with
minimum.
Stress to the individual fibers.
One or more strength members shall be an integral part of the cable
construction.
The strength members shall be sufficient to support the stress of installation and
to protect the cable in service.
Loose, fiber bundle (tube) or a slotted core type cable with multiple fibers per
tube or slot.
The core shall be filled with a compound to inhibit water migration and
wrapped
With a barrier tape.will at least be sufficiently translucent for fiber
identification.
Individual fibres shall be color coded.
The filling compound shall not affect the color of the individual fibers.
The filling compound shall be non-toxic and present no dermal hazards.
The drop point of the filling compound shall be not less than 85 deg c.
The filling compound shall remain stable and unaffected long term exposure to
weather.
The filling compound shall have chemical and mechanical compatibility with
other cable
Components and splicing hardware.
Cable jacket; the cable shall be lszh (low smoke zero halogen), double sheath
and contain
A ripcord under the sheath for easy sheath removal. the outer jacket shall
provide the
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Cable with a tough, flexible; protective covering which can withstand

exposure to sunlight, to atmospheric temperatures and to stresses that can be
expected in the installation of this cable.
The inner sheath thickness shall have a nominal value of 1.2 mm mimimum.
The outer jacket shall be sheathed with a high-density polyethylene (hdpe)
with a
Thickness that is suitable for the proposed environment, but not less than 1.6
mm.
The cable jacket shall be resistant to crude oil, hydrocarbons, sulfur
Compounds and salt water.
The cable jacket shall have permanent surface printed
sequentially
Numbered length markers at one-meter intervals.
The cable jacket shall have permanent surface printed marks at regular
intervals of not more than two (2) meters consisting of: manufacturer,
(number of fibers) \fiber optic cable and the actual year of manufacture.
2.1.4 Properties of cables:
The cable shall be manufactured to ITU G.652 (The cable ITU G. 652 is considered
based on the initial details from service provider-STC, however this needs to be officially
confirmed ) specifications and meet performance characteristic. The described above
which allows the use of non-metallic sheath.
Parameters shall be detailed for all the cables:
Number, materials and dimensions of strength members

Material quantity and dimensions of filler, wrappings, belts etc.
Material and dimensions of sheaths, jacket, moisture barriers, etc.
Diameter overall of finished cable
Tensile strength, minimum (finished cable)
Compressive strength, minimum (finished cable)
Bending radius, minimum (cable)
Final placement radius
Weight of cable per kilometer
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Minimum cable drum length 6 km long haul fiber

Cable life span
Cable batch test results (cert): with the following information as a minimum: mrd/concentricity,
cut off wavelength, attenuation coefficient, and chromatic dispersion.
PART-3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALATION
3.1.1 Fiber optic cable lying:
1. Minimum horizontal distance between the cable & the Pipeline shall be 0.15m.
Vertically observed, FOC shall be laid on the first ground compact layer above the
pipeline. Cable shall be routed in accordance with submitted and approved contract
drawings and the Engineers instruction.
2. The Cable shall be laid over a sand layer of approx. 30cm thick. The trench shall not
be back filled before being inspected and approved by Engineers
resentative.ackfilling shall be carried out in layers not more than 50mm thick and shall
be well consolidated by punning of each layer. Each cable shall be protected from
mechanical damage by forced concrete covers over the entire buried length. The
covers shall be at least 150mm wide and shall interlock to resist lateral displacement
following installation. The cover shall be laid centrally 300mm above the cable during
back filling of the trench.
Splice points are spaced to coincide with designated reel lengths.
3.1.2 FOC network accessories:
Cable warning tapes shall be installed 300mm above the cable covers during back
filling of the trench. The tape shall be made of high grade PVC and shall be 150mm
wide with a minimum thickness of 0.1mm. The tape shall be colored yellow with a
warning message printed in black continuously along its length. The printing shall be
fully resistant to deteriorating effects of direct burial.
For cases of crossings, locations, where a FOC cable passes under a road way
reinforced concrete trench or similar structure, the contractor shall supply and install
HDPE ducts/ conduits of approx. 110mm diameter.
Cable surface markers shall be provided and installed to mark the location and route
of buried cable, the quantity, material, inscription and method of installation markers
shall be subject of Engineers approval.
All the necessary fiber optic network accessories, draw/splice pits and manholes shall
be included.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Optical joint boxes/ FO splice cases/closures shall be used for splicing of the FOC
along the lines, where necessary. Contractor shall refer the FOC specification
document for Joint box characteristics.
The Contractor shall be responsible for forming holes through walls and floors and all
other work necessary for the installation of outdoor FOC inside the Transfer pump
station building.
Fiber optic network shall be terminated at fiber distribution panel (FDP) with all fibers
pig tails and patch cabling, per each termination point.
Fiber distribution panel shall be designed for wall installation. FDP shall have cable
gland to accept loose-buffered FOC with 6 core single mode outdoor fibers. Each FDP
is equipped with Pigtails. The Optical connectors shall be F.C- P.C type.
FDP shall be tamper-proof sealed and of rugged construction.
The fiber optic indoor cables connecting to FDP in Transfer pump station shall have
the same characteristics as of fiber optic approach cable, with the following
expectations.
Anti-termite for cable protection is not required.

Fibers shall be connectorized at both the ends in the factory.
3.1.3 Testing Requirements:
Outer Jacket
Cable Bend Test
Cable Impact Test
Cable Compression Test
Cable Twist Test
Cable Flex Test
Water Penetration Test (filled cables only)
Compound Flow Test (filled cables only)
3.1.4 Splices - Methods, Tests & Cautions
Splice fibers with approved fusion splicing equipment or approved mechanical splices.
Fiber optic splices shall be tested for splice loss as splices are being made, using an
approved optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) or local injection detection
.
1. Suitable splice locations are selected.
2. Splice locations are accessible.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
3. The number of splice points are kept to a minimum.

4. Buried splices and isolated conduit ends are identified with Electronic Marking
System (EMS) markers.
5. Splice locations are safe for personnel.
3.1.5 Splice Placement
Only direct buried type splice enclosures shall be used in direct buried cable systems.
The fiber optic cable "out-of-pit" cable slack shall be coiled and housed inside the
splice pit.
Splice Locations
Splice and other access points shall be located so as to avoid areas that:
1. Are vulnerable to damage by vehicular traffic or other means.
2. Are subject to flooding or standing water.
3. Have a number of obstacles (which would tend to increase the need to cut and
splice the Fiber optic cable), such as:
Railroads.
Highways.
Pipelines.
Driveways.
Parking lots
3.1.6 Testing & Inspection
The testing and acceptance of fiber optic telecommunication cables shall be done in
accordance with this standard. The Inspection Department shall be notified prior to the
testing of fiber optic telecommunication
3.1.7 Factory Acceptance Test
Each particular cable length shall be factory acceptance tested and shall be delivered
together with the respective test reports. Required tests are:
Attenuation tests of each fiber at 1.300 +30/-15 nm and at 1.550 +30/-70 nm with
Optical Time Domain Reflectrometry (OTDR) according to IEC 60793-1-4
double-sided shall be performed.
Dispersion tests of each fiber at 1.300 and 1.500 nm according to IEC 60793-1-4 shall
be performed.
These measurements shall be performed on each fiber prior to cable manufacturing
and on the fabricated cable.
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011
Tension and temperature test of the fiber optic cable, as homologation test,
and determination of resulting attenuation and variation in attenuation according to
IEC 60793-1-4 shall be performed.
Prior to the factory acceptance test the contractor shall provide a test Procedure which
is subject of approval by the owners engineer.
3.1.8 Receipt of Cable Test
Each particular cable length shall be tested upon receipt on site.

Attenuation tests of each fiber at 1.300 +30/-15 nm and at 1.550 +30/-70 nm
With OTDR according to IEC 60793-1-4 double-sided shall be performed.
Determination of optical length shall be performed.
3.1.9 Test protocols
Test protocols shall be provided for all activities conducted in course of tests.
3.1.10 Spare parts and accessories
In addition to the normal splicing tools, the following materials shall be required:
1. Optical fiber splicing kit.
2. Lint free tissue.
3. Isopropyl alcohol.
4. Approved cable cleaner.
5. Approved cleaver tool.
6. Means of communication.
7. Approved mechanical stripping tool to remove fiber coating.
- END OF SECTION -
Rev. 00
15 Mar, 2011

Division 16 - Electrical Work

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 16 - Electrical Work

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS

DESIGN CONSULTANTS STAMP:

SAUDI ARABIAN MINING COMPANY

P.O.BOX 684 AL-KHOBAR

IFB 00 15/03/2011 Issue for Bid IGA MAM MFU

CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

1.02 Codes and Standards

IEC 60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation

IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters

IEC 60255 Electrical relays

IEC 60269 Low-voltage fuses

IEC 60439 Low voltage switchgear and assemblies

IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

IEC 60904 Photovoltaic devices

IEC 61215 Crystalline silicon terrestrial photovoltaic modules

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

B. Prior to Commencing WORK: Shop drawings of proposed installations that deviate

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

3. Approved substitutions, modifications and actual equipment and materials

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

1.04 Environmental Conditions

1.05 Technical Data

2.01 Components and Equipment

For further requirements, reference is made to specification Design and Construction of

2.03 Units and Scales

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

2.04 Description of the System

2.05 Special Requirements

2.06 Solar Modules and Panels

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

2.07 Supporting Structure

2.08 Charge Regulator

2.09 Distribution Board

For each solar panel unit a distribution board shall be provided.

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

2.10 AC/DC Battery Charger

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

3.13 Design Factors

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

3.04 Overvoltage Protection

The distribution boards shall be equipped with additionally overvoltage protectors.

3.05 CABLES AND CABLE LAYING

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

3.08 Workshop Tests

The following tests shall be carried out, at least:

DICIPLENE: ELECTRICAL DOCUMENT No.: MGBM-SPEC-0001

Rev. 00 CONTRACT NO. 10-1448-HQ-715

3.09 Site Tests

The site tests shall include the following steps:

Pre-commissioning (including loop testing),

Complete documentation shall be provided for the design, manufacturing, testing,

Technical data sheets